<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mouse-tache</id>
	<title>AkanaWiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mouse-tache"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/wiki/Special:Contributions/Mouse-tache"/>
	<updated>2026-08-20T05:49:52Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.8</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16133</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16133"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T21:33:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Phonology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ʦ, ʃ, and j are written ts, ś, and y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phonotactics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vowel hiatus is not allowed within a word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most CC clusters are allowed, but only hC, Ch, kw, and ny are common. Ts does not count as a cluster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ihnahmo&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In the valley&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a patient&lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;śkaksa&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Friends&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kwetseme&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Jumping&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cried and (then) laughed&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16132</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16132"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T21:32:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Phonology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ʦ, ʃ, and j are written ts, ś, and y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phonotactics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vowel hiatus is not allowed within a word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most CC clusters are allowed, but only hC, Ch, kw, and ny are common.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ihnahmo&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In the valley&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a patient&lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;śkaksa&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Friends&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kwetseme&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Jumping&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cried and (then) laughed&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16131</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16131"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T21:31:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Phonology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ʦ, ʃ, and j are written c, ś, and y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phonotactics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vowel hiatus is not allowed within a word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most CC clusters are allowed, but only hC, Ch, kw, and ny are common.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ihnahmo&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In the valley&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a patient&lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;śkaksa&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Friends&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kwetseme&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Jumping&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cried and (then) laughed&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16130</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16130"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T21:22:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Nominal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ihnahmo&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In the valley&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a patient&lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;śkaksa&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Friends&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kwetseme&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Jumping&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cried and (then) laughed&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16129</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16129"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T21:06:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Nominal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ihnahmo&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In the valley&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cried and (then) laughed&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16128</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16128"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T21:04:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Nominal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ihnahmo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cried and (then) laughed&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16127</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16127"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T21:01:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Clausal Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cried and (then) laughed&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16126</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16126"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T20:59:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Clausal Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepahe sa kakwaya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;cry and (then) laugh&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16125</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16125"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T20:57:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsenyepa sa kakwa&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;cry and (then) laugh&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16124</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16124"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T20:55:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The proximal and distal pronouns have adverbial equivalents, yaśi and kweśi, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clauses can be linked with post-positioned conjunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tsenyepa sa kakwa&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16123</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16123"/>
		<updated>2022-01-01T20:32:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verb Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clausal Syntax ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pronoun lo (animate) or lani (inanimate) begins relative clauses. Relative clauses precede their target noun.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=File:SahaxeRange.png&amp;diff=16082</id>
		<title>File:SahaxeRange.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=File:SahaxeRange.png&amp;diff=16082"/>
		<updated>2021-11-10T00:43:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: A map of the range in which Sahaśe is spoken.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;A map of the range in which Sahaśe is spoken.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16050</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16050"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:31:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Noun Phrase */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and come in personal and non-personal varieties. The personal pronouns are 1st person na (oblique no) and 2nd person ta (oblique to). Non-personal pronouns do not decline for case, but have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Pronouns never indicate number or take the locative case ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16049</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16049"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:29:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Noun Phrase */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Note that pronouns do not decline for number or case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For humans, the pronouns are yo, ku&lt;br /&gt;
For non-humans, they are yani, kwini&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16048</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16048"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:29:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Noun Phrase */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Note that pronouns do not decline for number or case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For humans, the pronouns are yo, ku&lt;br /&gt;
For non-humans, they are yani, kwini&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! proximal !! distal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! human&lt;br /&gt;
| yo || ku&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! non-human&lt;br /&gt;
| yani || kwini&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16047</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16047"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:27:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pronouns may stand in for nouns, and have proximate and distal versions. The proximate versions may indicate something close at hand or topical, while the distal versions indicate old information or things far from the speaker. Note that pronouns do not decline for number or case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For humans, the pronouns are yo, ku&lt;br /&gt;
For non-humans, they are yani, kwini&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerals, properties, and possessors precede the head noun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16046</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16046"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:26:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adverbs ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16045</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16045"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:26:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Noun Phrase ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16044</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16044"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:26:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe has strict head-final syntax.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16043</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16043"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T04:25:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16042</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16042"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T03:31:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Nominal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o. There is also a productive locative, formed by replacing the final vowel with -ahmo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Tma%C5%9Bare%CA%94&amp;diff=16041</id>
		<title>Tmaśareʔ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Tma%C5%9Bare%CA%94&amp;diff=16041"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:28:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Tmaśareʔ&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [ˈtmɑ.ʃɑ.ɾɛʔ]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -1800 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Kipceʔ desert&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 15,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = highly synthetic; agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Cedh|Cedh]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language of the [[Western languages|Western]] family, spoken on the northern fringe of the [[Kipceʔ desert]] on the west coast of [[Peilaš]]. It is the southernmost direct descendant of [[Proto-Western]], and it has been significantly influenced by an unknown substrate language. Apart from providing a number of loanwords, this substrate is assumed to be the source of linguistic features in Tmaśareʔ that are not found in other Western languages, for instance reduplicative plural formation and a productive alternation between approximants and nasals based on vowel nasality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ culture is still somewhat similar to the [[Proto-Western/Culture|culture of Proto-Western speakers]]; notably, the religion is still built around the concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;kwaco&#039;&#039;&#039; (&amp;quot;strength&amp;quot; associated with bodily fluids, especially blood and semen). Due to the scarcity of resources in the dry environment, most speakers of Tmaśareʔ are not fully sedentary. Usually they migrate up and down a river with the seasons, focusing on fishing at the coast in the dry summer, small-scale agriculture in the river valleys in the more humid winter, and goat- and sheep-herding as well as hunting all year round. Villages are often moved every few years so as not to exhaust the soil too soon. Bronze is known but obtainable only from trade with other Western or even [[Lukpanic languages|Lukpanic]] peoples further north, which doesn&#039;t happen too often (the Tmaśareʔ don&#039;t have much to offer in return). Writing is unknown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! dental&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! lab-vel&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t || ʦ || ʧ || k || kʷ || ʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || || s || ʃ || || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || || n || ɲ || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || || l · ɾ || j || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* /kʷ ʦ ʧ ʃ ɲ ɾ j/ are written &#039;&#039;&#039;kw c ć ś ń r y&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a · ã ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Nasalized vowels are written with an ogonek: &#039;&#039;&#039;ę ą ǫ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Distribution and phonotactics ==&lt;br /&gt;
Syllable structure is &#039;&#039;&#039;(C)(C)CV(C)&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The onset may consist of any single consonant, of a plosive followed by a nasal, or of two non-identical obstruents other than /h/. Word-initially, three-term onset clusters consisting of two plosives separated by a sibilant are also permissible. Clusters ending in one of /t ʦ ʧ/ may additionally be followed by /w/, and clusters ending in one of /p t k/ may additionally be followed by /j/. Empty onsets only occur word-initially. As the glottal stop is not found in that position, onsetless syllables are sometimes analysed as containing underlying /ʔ/. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All single consonants except /w j/ can appear in a medial syllable coda; however, coda consonants other than /ʔ h/ are fairly rare. (Note that pure obstruent clusters are usually syllabified as complex onsets.) Nasal coda consonants can only occur in geminates, and coda /ɾ/ can only occur before nasals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of a word, /ʔ/ is the only allowed coda consonant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following additional restrictions apply:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; does not occur immediately after &#039;&#039;&#039;y&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The liquid consonants &#039;&#039;&#039;w l r y&#039;&#039;&#039; do not occur after nasalized vowels.&lt;br /&gt;
* The distinction between /k/ and /kʷ/ is contrastive only in prevocalic position. /kʷ/ never contrasts with the cluster /kw/, but it is analysed as a separate phoneme because of its high frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phonetic detail ==&lt;br /&gt;
* In the prestige dialect, obstruents are almost never voiced. Some speakers have voiced allophones of non-glottal obstruents adjacent to nasals and nasalized vowels though, and sometimes after &#039;&#039;&#039;l&#039;&#039;&#039; as well. In dialects that have it, obstruent voicing is blocked by adjacent voiceless consonants.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plosives are aspirated when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;h&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;m n ń l r&#039;&#039;&#039; are devoiced in the same position. In the prestige variety, devoiced nasals are realized as a nasalized vowel followed by a voiceless fricative: /Vhm Vhn Vhɲ/ → [Ṽɸ Ṽθ Ṽç].&lt;br /&gt;
* Before obstruents, coda &#039;&#039;&#039;h&#039;&#039;&#039; is normally realized as velar [x], though it may become [ç] when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or followed by &#039;&#039;&#039;ć y&#039;&#039;&#039;, and [ɸ] when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;o ǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or followed by &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ć ś&#039;&#039;&#039; become alveolo-palatal [ʨ ɕ] when adjacent to &#039;&#039;&#039;i ń l&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;l&#039;&#039;&#039; is commonly palatalized to [ʎ] when adjacent to &#039;&#039;&#039;i ć ś ń&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In other positions, coda &#039;&#039;&#039;l&#039;&#039;&#039; is darkened to [ɫ] or even [ɰ].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;w&#039;&#039;&#039; is normally realized as a purely labial approximant [β̞], which is devoiced to [ɸ] when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;h&#039;&#039;&#039;. Intervocalic &#039;&#039;&#039;w&#039;&#039;&#039; may also be realized as [w], especially when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* When preceding a nasalized vowel, postconsonantal &#039;&#039;&#039;w r l j&#039;&#039;&#039; are realized as [m n n ɲ] (written &#039;&#039;&#039;m n n ń&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039; is realized as [e] word-finally, and as [ɛ] elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;a&#039;&#039;&#039; is [ʌ] in unstressed open syllables, and [ɑ] elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039; is [ʊ] in unstressed open syllables, [o] in stressed open syllables, and [ɔ] in closed syllables.&lt;br /&gt;
* Nasalized &#039;&#039;&#039;ę ą ǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; are [{{IPA|ɛ̃ ɑ̃ ɔ̃}}] in all positions. &lt;br /&gt;
* In stressed open syllables, nasalized vowels (but not oral ones) are lengthened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stress ==&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has a dynamic stress accent. Most words are accented on the first syllable of the root; however, pluralized nouns normally stress the reduplicated syllable (i.e. the first vowel of the word), and most conjunctions, particles, and postpositions are unaccented. Some but not all of those grammatical morphemes cliticize to other sentence constituents, becoming part of the host&#039;s prosodic group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longer words containing at least three post-tonic syllables exhibit one or more positional secondary accents. These are placed on every even syllable counting from the end of the word; however, syllables immediately adjacent to the main stress do not receive secondary stress. If a word ends in a glottal stop, the last secondary accent moves from the penult to the final syllable, triggering exceptional secondary stress on the antepenultimate if the fifth-to-last vowel carries a lexical accent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As exceptions to the above, compounds (which includes nouns with an adjectival prefix) normally stress the first syllable of the first root, with the second root receiving secondary stress if its accented syllable does not end up adjacent to the main stress. Further secondary stress is assigned by counting from the end of the word as usual. Verbs with an incorporated object do not fall under this rule; the object - even though it follows the verb root - receives positional stress only, which can lead to a changed prosodic pattern as compared to the full nominal form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sound changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{collapsible||&lt;br /&gt;
The following set of sound changes from Proto-Western to Tmaśareʔ has been reconstructed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Unstressed medial NV syllables were lost before a non-nasal consonant with compensatory nasalization of preceding oral vowels. The remaining consonant acquired palatalization or labialization if the lost vowel had been [i] or [u] respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
# The lateral fricative [ɬ] assimilated to neighbouring sibilants, merged into [l] after consonants and nasalized vowels, and lenited to [h] otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
# [b d ʣ ʤ ɣ ɣʷ] became [m n n ɲ ŋ ŋʷ] adjacent to a nasalized vowel. When preceded by a nasalized vowel, [l j w] also became [n ɲ ŋʷ], but not when followed by one. Nasal vowels preceded by an obstruent that was affected by this change merged into their oral counterparts.&lt;br /&gt;
# Lenition:&lt;br /&gt;
#* [l] disappeared after consonants, leaving palatalization (probably via [ʎ]).&lt;br /&gt;
#* Initial and intervocalic [b d ʣ ʤ] lenited to [β ɾ z ʒ]. In all other positions they merged into the voiceless unaspirated plosive series, i.e. [p t ʦ ʧ].&lt;br /&gt;
#* [ɣ] merged with [j] in initial position and when palatalized, and [ɣʷ] merged with [w] except when followed by [u]. All remaining [ɣ] and [ɣʷ] were deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
# Vowel synaeresis: &lt;br /&gt;
#* Coda [j w] vocalized to [i u].&lt;br /&gt;
#* Sequences of two identical vowels created by the above changes were shortened with compensatory gemination of following single consonants.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Any prevocalic [i u] became [j w] respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
#* When not followed by a vowel, [eu au ou] all became [ow], and [ei ai oi] all became [ej].&lt;br /&gt;
#* [u ũ ĩ] became [o õ ẽ] in all positions.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Somewhat sporadically, [i] became [e] when preceded by one of [ʧʰ ʧ ʃ ʒ kʰ k j]. This change appears to have been general after [j], but limited to unstressed environments (mostly in word-final position) after the other consonants listed. Postalveolar consonants followed by a vowel undergoing this change were usually depalatalized to alveolars [ʦʰ ʦ s z].&lt;br /&gt;
#* [ej] raised to [i], causing palatalization on subsequent consonants. Somewhat in parallel, [ow] reduced to [o] with labialization on following plosives.&lt;br /&gt;
# [tʲ ʦʲ kʲ mʲ nʲ ŋʲ lʲ ɾʲ] became [ʦ ʧ ʧ ɲ ɲ ɲ ʎ ʎ]. Palatalization was then lost from all consonants except [ʔ].&lt;br /&gt;
# All labialized nasals merged with [m], except when followed by [o], in which case the rounded vowel absorbed the labial coarticulation. Also, [ʦʷ ʦʷʰ] were simplified to [tʷ tʷʰ].&lt;br /&gt;
# [pʷ pʷʰ pʰ] all lenited to [ɸ]. This change was blocked by any preceding consonant.&lt;br /&gt;
# Aspiration on plosives was lost if an adjacent syllable contained [h]. Remaining aspiration was transferred from the syllable onset to the coda of the same syllable, being lost only when it ended up preceding one of [ʔ h] (generally) or [ɾ l ʎ] (within the same morpheme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Medial vowels in open syllables were deleted under somewhat uncertain conditions. It is usually assumed that all vowels carrying primary or secondary stress were retained; however, if this holds true the location of the accent must have been different from both the earlier Proto-Western and the later Tmaśareʔ systems. Also, the earliest vowel deletions must have begun before the lenition of labialized/aspirated [p] (change #8), while the last ones clearly postdate the lenition of [β z ʒ] (change #13). Closer examination of the phonological patterns reveals that pure obstruent clusters were far more likely to be formed than most other types, and that syncope operated most strongly in pre-stress position. Curiously, clusters of a liquid or semivowel followed by an obstruent, a very frequent type crosslinguistically, were apparently not formed - almost all examples of such are either loanwords or retentions from PW.&lt;br /&gt;
# Many clusters were simplified. The most prominent processes include devoicing of all clustered obstruents, total assimilation of pure fricative clusters, reduction of affricates to a simple sibilant when followed by another affricate, fortification of sibilants to affricates when preceded by a liquid or nasal, and condensation of [w β ɸ] into labialization of preceding [t ʦ ʧ k ʔ]. Labialized plosives followed by a sibilant simplified to [p]; before plosives, labialization was normally transferred to the last obstruent in the cluster instead.&lt;br /&gt;
# [wa wã] became [o õ] in all positions, and [we wẽ] did the same before labialized consonants (including [ɸ] {{--}} /hʷ/). In addition to this, [ẽ ã] followed by one of [ʔʷ m] were rounded to [õ], and [ã õ] followed by one of [ʔʲ ɲ] were fronted to [ẽ]. Occasionally, oral vowels in the same positions were affected in a similar manner.&lt;br /&gt;
# [β z ʒ] were devoiced to [ɸ s ʃ] word-initially. In all other positions they lenited to [w ɾ ʎ] instead.&lt;br /&gt;
# Word-final oral vowels were lost after [ʔ], along with any coarticulation on the glottal stop. Remaining medial [ʔʷ ʔʲ] uncoupled to [ʔw ʔj].&lt;br /&gt;
# Word-final [p t ʦ ʧ k] all reduced to [ʔ], and word-final [h] was lost outright.&lt;br /&gt;
# Any nasal followed by a different consonant or a word boundary was lost with nasalization of a preceding oral vowel. {{!}}i~{{!}} became [ẽ].&lt;br /&gt;
# [w ɾ l ʎ j] became [m n n ɲ ɲ] between a consonant and a nasalized vowel in either order, or when sandwiched between two nasalized vowels, but not between one nasalized and one oral vowel in either order. Offglides of labialized obstruents were affected as well, resulting in Cm clusters. (This change strongly resembles #3, and in fact it may have been active all along).&lt;br /&gt;
# Epenthetic [h] was inserted between any sequences of two adjacent vowels, except where one of these vowels bordered a consonant group that included [h] already. In such cases, the epenthetic consonant was [ʔ].&lt;br /&gt;
# [ɸ] merged with [h], [ʎ] merged with [l], and [ŋ] merged with [ɲ].&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
The three cases of Proto-Western (absolutive, ergative, construct) are retained in Tmaśareʔ, with the construct being reanalysed as a genitive. On the other hand, the edibility distinction has been lost, and even though the plural is retained as an inflectional category, the inherited number morphology has become unproductive and survives only in pronouns and a few fossilized lexical items. Noun plurals are now formed by a reduplicative strategy, picked up from a substrate language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The citation form of Tmaśareʔ nouns is the absolutive singular.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Case ===&lt;br /&gt;
The ergative and genitive cases are formed by ablaut of the final vowel of the noun stem, combined with a suffixed glottal stop:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! absolutive !! ergative !! genitive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! e/i-stem&lt;br /&gt;
| -e, -i || -iʔ || rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -oʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! a/o-stem&lt;br /&gt;
| -a, -o || -eʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal stem&lt;br /&gt;
| -ę, -ą, -ǫ || -ęʔ || -ǫʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some nouns end in a glottal stop in the absolutive case. These words take the regular affixes &#039;&#039;&#039;-eʔ&#039;&#039;&#039; in the ergative and &#039;&#039;&#039;-oʔ&#039;&#039;&#039; in the genitive, but often undergo stem changes with the addition of a case suffix. Most frequently, the stem-final glottal stop reverts to its original value (which may be any other plosive consonant); sometimes a vowel is dropped as well. Irregular oblique stems are indicated in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;hąse&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;horse&#039; ({{sc|abs}}) → {{sc|erg}} &#039;&#039;&#039;hąs{{red|iʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;, {{sc|gen}} &#039;&#039;&#039;hąs{{red|oʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;kwela&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;child&#039; ({{sc|abs}}) → {{sc|erg}} &#039;&#039;&#039;kwel{{red|eʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;, {{sc|gen}} &#039;&#039;&#039;kwel{{red|oʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;tohną&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;headman of a family&#039; ({{sc|abs}}) → {{sc|erg}} &#039;&#039;&#039;tohn{{red|ęʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;, {{sc|gen}} &#039;&#039;&#039;tohn{{red|ǫʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Number ===&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike those of Proto-Western, Tmaśareʔ nominals do not inflect for dual number. The inherited suffixal plural morphology was originally replaced by reduplication of the first C(C)V portion of the stem; however, this pattern has become obscured by a combination of stress shift and vowel syncope. Synchronically, plurals usually look like an infixed copy of the initial consonant(s), with echo vowels as needed to conform to phonotactic rules. Words with initial nasals regularly form their plural with nasalization of the first vowel (often accompanied by a change in quality); vowel-initial words tend to use either /-hV-/ or /-ʔ-/ as the plural infix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quite a number of words have slightly irregular plural forms. In addition, there is a distinct class of &#039;&#039;mass nouns&#039;&#039; that do not form plurals; these mostly belong to one of the noun classes IV, V, and VI. Plurals are given in the lexicon for all nouns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;takala&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;rope&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;ta{{red|t}}kala&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;ropes&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;kohta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;boat&#039; →  &#039;&#039;&#039;ko{{red|ko}}hta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;boats&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;mera&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;dog&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;m{{red|ǫ}}ra&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;dogs&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;aśę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;woman&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;a{{red|ʔ}}śę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;women&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Possession ===&lt;br /&gt;
Like its predecessor, Tmaśareʔ distinguishes between alienable and inalienable forms of possession. Alienably possessed nouns are simply accompanied by their possessor, cast in the genitive, whereas inalienably possessed nouns take an obligatory possessive prefix marking number and person of the possessor. Note that the possessor need not necessarily be present as an overt noun phrase. For first and second person possessors, the possessive prefixes still have a separate set of forms deriving from the PW dual. However, these are now used for any small group of inextricably linked possessors, e.g. for a group of brothers (even if there are three or four of them), and are probably best interpreted as paucal or collective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! singular !! &amp;amp;nbsp; paucal &amp;amp;nbsp; !! &amp;amp;nbsp; plural &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 1st&lt;br /&gt;
| na- || ę- || ǫk-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 2nd&lt;br /&gt;
| ć- || c- || ik-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 3rd&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | e- || k-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When followed by a consonant cluster or a glottal consonant, the plural forms appear in the alternative allomorphs &#039;&#039;&#039;ǫka-, iko-&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;kwe-&#039;&#039;&#039;. Before oral vowels they appear as &#039;&#039;&#039;ǫkw-, ikw-&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;kw-&#039;&#039;&#039;, and before nasal vowels they appear as &#039;&#039;&#039;ǫkm-, ikm-&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;km-&#039;&#039;&#039; respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
* The 2sg and 2pc prefixes become &#039;&#039;&#039;će- ce-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a consonant cluster or a glottal consonant, and &#039;&#039;&#039;ś- s-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by an affricate.&lt;br /&gt;
* The 1sg and 3sg/pc prefixes add an epenthetic /ʔ/ before vowels, while the 1pc prefix adds /n/.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|naʔ}}ilca&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;my hand&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ć}}tohną&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;your({{sc|sg}}) father&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|km}}ǫʔta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;their teeth&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The alienable/inalienable distinction also serves as a productive method to change the meaning of nouns:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;man&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|e}}la&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;her husband&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|na}}nańo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;my foot&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|k}}nęńo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;their feet&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;nańo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;platform, base&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same prefixes also appear on verbal nouns in subordinate clauses, specifying the subject (i.e. the syntactic pivot) of the nominalized verb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;mihe-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;to be absent&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ik}}mihmę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;your({{sc|pl}}) absence&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;lǫpa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;to kiss&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ę}}nǫpamę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;our({{sc|pc}}) kiss; the event of the two of us kissing each other&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Noun classes ===&lt;br /&gt;
The pronominal classifiers of Proto-Western, which could be assigned pragmatically depending on the edibility and/or semantic role of the referent, have become fixed in reference in Tmaśareʔ, thus creating a system of lexical noun classes. These classes are not marked on the nouns themselves in any way; however, pronouns, determiners, and 3rd person absolutive participant marking on verbs exhibit noun class concord. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of the nine classifiers reconstructed for Proto-Western, two pairs have merged: those for edible and inedible solid objects (&#039;&#039;*-ca-&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;*-ta-&#039;&#039;), and those for edible and inedible mushy objects (&#039;&#039;*-če-&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;*-kʰiw-&#039;&#039;). The latter group (Tmaśareʔ noun class V) is increasingly becoming confused with classes IV and VI (granular masses and liquids, respectively); these three classes are rarest and tend to include mostly mass nouns with no distinct plural forms and often fairly similar semantics. Among those speakers that conflate them, usually classifier IV is the one that prevails morphologically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The resulting classifier system is shown in the table below. Note that all classifiers have several allomorphs depending on the phonological environment. For convenience, the most frequent surface forms of all classifiers will be listed separately in the relevant chapters of this grammar sketch ([[#Proximate and obviative pronouns|3rd and 4th person pronouns]], [[#Other pronominals|correlative pronouns]], and [[#Participant marking|verbal agreement]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; C_ &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! V_{ʔ,h,CC}&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; V_C &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; V~_C &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; V~_# &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; V_# &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| -wa-/-o- || -ho- || -h- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ma- || -ho&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;humans, gods, spirits etc.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ta- || -s- || -t- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ta&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;animals, solid spherical or irregularly shaped objects&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| -ǫ- || -ńǫ- || {{sc|nas}} || colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; | -ńǫ-&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;tools, weapons, solid long objects&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| -ki- || -hki- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -hk- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -hke&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;granular masses&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -će- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ć- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -će&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;soft objects; mushy matter&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| {{sc|pal}}-e- || -ye- || {{sc|del}}-i-{{sc|pal}} || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ńe- || -ye&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;liquids, fire, wind etc.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -śi- || -ś- || -h- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -se&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;intangible or abstract nominals, geographical features, trees&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|nas}} indicates that the classifier is realized as nasalization on the preceding vowel.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|pal}} indicates that preceding or following prevocalic /t ʦ k s n/ palatalize to /ʦ ʧ ʧ ʃ ɲ/.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that the preceding vowel is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* The postconsonantal class I classifier is &#039;&#039;&#039;-wa-&#039;&#039;&#039; after /t ʦ ʧ k ʔ/, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-o-&#039;&#039;&#039; after other consonants.&lt;br /&gt;
* Classifiers V and VII merge phonetically when immediately followed by an affricate; the resulting forms are those given for class VII.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Personal pronouns ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has true personal pronouns only for speech act participants. They inflect for case in exactly the same way as regular nouns. However, they do not form their plural via reduplication, using distinct plural stems instead. In the first person, the plural is suppletive; in the second person, it contains a reflex of the original plural marker &#039;&#039;*-kʷ&#039;&#039;, analogically extended to &#039;&#039;&#039;-kwe-&#039;&#039;&#039; with the phonetic reduction of PW case suffixes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1st person&#039;&#039;&#039; (speaker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! absolutive !! ergative !! genitive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
| na || neʔ || noʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plural&lt;br /&gt;
| sa || seʔ || soʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2nd person&#039;&#039;&#039; (listener)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! absolutive !! ergative !! genitive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
| ta || teʔ || toʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plural&lt;br /&gt;
| tkwe || tkwiʔ || tkwoʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proximate and obviative pronouns ===&lt;br /&gt;
The anaphoric and cataphoric pronoun stems of Proto-Western, &#039;&#039;*ya-&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;*kʷi-&#039;&#039;, have been reanalysed as proximate and obviative (3rd and 4th person) respectively. Unlike 1st and 2nd person pronouns, these inflect not only for case and number, but also for noun class. Case inflection is regular. Number inflection uses the analogically extended &#039;&#039;*-kʷ&#039;&#039; morpheme instead of reduplication, like the 2nd person pronouns. However, sound changes have fused the original phoric stems with the classifiers in many forms, to a point where it is easier to treat Tmaśareʔ proximate and obviative pronouns as having distinct stems for each combination of class, person, and number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3rd person&#039;&#039;&#039; (proximate)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; plural &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| yaho- || yoʔ, yokwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| yata- || cakwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| yańǫ- || ńǫkwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| yahke- || śkikwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| yaće- || ćekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| yaye- || yekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| yaśe- || śikwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;yokwe&#039;&#039;&#039; is the regular stem of the class I 3pl pronoun, and also used as a more formal absolutive. In colloquial speech, the absolutive is reduced to &#039;&#039;&#039;yoʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;; the other cases remain regular.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4th person&#039;&#039;&#039; (obviative)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; plural &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| kwa- || kwakwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| kwita- || psakwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| kwińǫ- || kmǫkwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| kwihke- || kwihkwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| kwiće- || pśekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| kwoye- || kwoyekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| kwiśe- || pśikwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other pronominals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstratives, indefinite quantifiers, and interrogative pronouns were originally built on the same template as the 3rd and 4th person pronouns - a deictic stem, followed by a classifier, followed by case/number inflection. During the development of Tmaśareʔ, the deictic elements were increasingly perceived as proclitic morphemes, which eventually came to be used with all nominals. In some colloquial registers they can even be added to other pronouns for locational or referential emphasis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! deictic !! gloss&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| śe=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | this&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ra=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | that&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ya=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | the aforementioned one(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| yel=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | the other one(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| twi=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | some, a few&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ląc=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | many&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ha=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | all, every&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ye=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | no, none&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| wi=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | which, what&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;śe=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;ś=&#039;&#039;&#039; before vowels and single stem-initial plosives, and to &#039;&#039;&#039;ć=&#039;&#039;&#039; before stem-initial nasals.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ra=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;r=&#039;&#039;&#039; before vowels, and to &#039;&#039;&#039;t=&#039;&#039;&#039; before /p k kʷ m n ɲ w/.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;twi=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;tw=&#039;&#039;&#039; before oral vowels, to &#039;&#039;&#039;tm=&#039;&#039;&#039; before nasalized vowels, and usually (but not always) to &#039;&#039;&#039;toʔ=&#039;&#039;&#039; before nasals.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ye=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;i=&#039;&#039;&#039; before stem-initial consonant clusters.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shortening before consonants does not happen if this would cause the resulting word to become monosyllabic.&lt;br /&gt;
* When attached to nouns, all deictic proclitics may co-occur with plural marking; however, the quantifying &#039;&#039;&#039;twi=&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;ląc=&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;ha=&#039;&#039;&#039; are more commonly used with singular nouns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ś}}kahpa&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;this tree&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ra}}cacnanǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;those spears&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|toʔ}}nęke&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;a few steps&#039; (note the singular stem; cf. {{sc|pl}} &#039;&#039;&#039;nenęke&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|tm}}ęta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;some feathers&#039; (cf. {{sc|pl}} &#039;&#039;&#039;ęʔta&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|wi}}psanǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;which knife?&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combined with the classifiers, the deictic clitics can be arranged into a large but mostly regular table of correlative pro-forms, which is given below. Note that the demonstratives have separate plural forms. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; this &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; that &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; some &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; many &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; every &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; no &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! question&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| śeho-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śokwe- || raho-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;rokwe- || twiho- || lątwa- || haho- || yeho- || wiho-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| śeta-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śtakwe- || rata-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;ratkwe- || twita- || lącta- || hata- || yeta- || wita-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| śeńǫ-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śękwe- || rańǫ-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;rękwe- || twińǫ- || lącńǫ- || hańǫ- || yeńǫ- || wińǫ-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| śehke-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śkikwe- || rahke-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;tkihkwe- || twihke- || lącke- || hahke- || yehke- || wihke-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| śeće-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śećkwe- || raće-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;raćkwe- || twiće- || ląsće- || haće- || yeće- || wiće-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| śeye-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śikwe- || raye-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;rikwe- || twiye- || ląće- || haye- || yeye- || wiye-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| śeśi-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śeśkwe- || raśi-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;raśkwe- || twiśi- || ląći- || haśi- || yeśi- || wiśi-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Numerals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ retains the base-8 number system of Proto-Western. Numeric quantifiers come in three forms: (1) Indeclinable numeral particles, which consist of the bare stem and are used for counting and compounding; (2) cardinal numerals, which function like pronouns and inflect for case and noun class (note that the latter is agreement, and thus mandatory even when used attributively); and (3) ordinal numerals, formed with the suffix &#039;&#039;&#039;-ro&#039;&#039;&#039;, which may only be used as modifiers of a nominal head in this bare form and are thus syntactically comparable to a noun in the genitive case, but which may be extended to full pronominals by suffixing an appropriate classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The paradigm for numerals is entirely regular, with classifiers suffixed to the numeral stem. However, note that the class VII classifier appears in the form &#039;&#039;-se&#039;&#039; (unlike with other pronouns), and that all numeral stems lose their final vowel in compounds with a vowel-initial noun stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; !! stem !! ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 1 &lt;br /&gt;
| takwa- || takwaro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| śi- || śiro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nahto- || nahtoro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| męca- || męcaro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| ora- || oraro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| męći- || męćiro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| nalći- || nalćiro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| ńaho- || ńahoro&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiples of eight are formed with an ordinal followed by the cardinal. Note also that nouns accompanied by a numeral always appear in their singular form:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;nahtoro ńahońǫ yeći&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;nahto-ro ńaho-ńǫ yeći&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;three-ORD eight-CL.III arrow&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;twenty-four arrows (lit. &amp;quot;third eight&amp;quot;)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other numerals are formed as a coordinated phrase, with the enclitic &#039;&#039;&#039;=ʔma&#039;&#039;&#039; suffixed to the unit number: &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ńaho śitaʔma mera&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ńaho śi-ta=ʔma mera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;eight two-CL.II=and dog&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;ten dogs (lit. &amp;quot;eight and two&amp;quot;)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distributive numerals are formed with reduplication, like the plural forms of nouns.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;memęcahke oha&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;me~męca-hke oha&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;DISTR~four-CL.IV bean&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;four beans each&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Verbal Complex ==&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has extended the verbal system of Proto-Western significantly through the agglutination (and, to some extent, fusion) of adpositions and particles to the verb, resulting in a polysynthetic verbal complex that is best described in terms of a positional template containing twelve slots. By far the most part of verbal morphology is suffixing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| I || II || III || IV || V || VI || VII || VIII || IX || X || XI || XII&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(applicative)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;stem&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(incorporated noun)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(directional)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(causative)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(modal)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(evidential)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(ergative)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;absolutive&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(aspect)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(negation)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(speech act)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the verb stem (which may itself be polymorphemic - e.g. formed by compounding or by adding a derivational affix) and the absolutive agreement suffix are mandatory with all verbs. Ergative agreement is mandatory with transitive verbs; all other affixes are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Applicatives ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are four applicative prefixes that can be used to promote an oblique argument to the rank of primary absolutive, triggering agreement with this argument. Depending on lexical properties of the verb, the original absolutive participant may be left out, become incorporated, or stay in place as long as the verb remains maximally ditransitive. If the original absolutive is omitted, the applicativized argument itself may undergo incorporation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The applicative prefixes are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* benefactive ({{sc|ben}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;c-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;ca-&#039;&#039;&#039; before stem-initial consonant clusters or /s ʃ h l j/; &#039;&#039;&#039;s-&#039;&#039;&#039; before /ʦ ʧ/; causes following /r/ to mutate to /t/)&lt;br /&gt;
* instrumental ({{sc|instr}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;mek-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;meʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; before /k kʷ l r j ɲ/; causes following /h/ to mutate to /w/ or /l/ depending on etymology)&lt;br /&gt;
* locative ({{sc|loc}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;twe-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;tm-&#039;&#039;&#039; before nasal vowels; &#039;&#039;&#039;tw-&#039;&#039;&#039; before oral vowels) &lt;br /&gt;
* lative ({{sc|lat}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;k-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;ke-&#039;&#039;&#039; before /l/ and most consonant clusters; causes following /r/ to mutate to /t/; causes following /h/ to mutate to /w/ or /l/ depending on etymology)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;kwekwo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;cook&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|c}}kwekwo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;cook for so.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;woʔla-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;plan, come up with&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|c}}woʔla-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;suggest sth. to so.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;yahke-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;keep&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ca}}yahke-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;take care of sth. on behalf of so.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;romę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;lend, borrow&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|c}}tomę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;lend for the purpose of&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;olca-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hit&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|mek}}olca-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hit with sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;homę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;help&#039;  → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|meʔ}}lomę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;help by doing/using sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;ćeka-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;sit&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|twe}}ćeka-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;sit (at a place)&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;somo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;agree&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|twe}}somo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;approve of sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;yele-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;run&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|k}}yele-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;run towards sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;cana-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;glow&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|k}}cana-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;illuminate sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directionals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Two directional suffixes have become grammaticalized as inflectional markers specifying the direction of movement with regard to the &amp;quot;focus point&amp;quot;, which is determined by context - usually one of speaker, addressee, or sentence topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* motion towards focus ({{sc|all}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-hca-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* motion away from focus ({{sc|abl}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔco-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;ye-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;go&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;ye{{red|hca}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;come, arrive&#039;; &#039;&#039;&#039;ye{{red|ʔco}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;leave&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;okmę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;carry&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;okmę{{red|hca}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;bring&#039;; &#039;&#039;&#039;okmę{{red|ʔco}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;carry away&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Causative ===&lt;br /&gt;
A morphological causative can be formed with a suffix that shows up as &#039;&#039;&#039;-na-&#039;&#039;&#039; when preceded by a nasalized vowel, as &#039;&#039;&#039;-s-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a plosive or sibilant, as &#039;&#039;&#039;-r-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a nasal consonant, and as &#039;&#039;&#039;-ra-&#039;&#039;&#039; otherwise. [[#Causativization|Causativization]] adds an agent to the verb, demoting any pre-existing agent from ergative to absolutive (monotransitives only) or oblique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* causative ({{sc|caus}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-na-/-s-/-r-/-ra-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modals ===&lt;br /&gt;
The next slot in the verbal template indicates modality. There are three morphemes that can appear here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* optative ({{sc|opt}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ći-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* obligative ({{sc|obl}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-tę-/-tańa-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* abilitative ({{sc|abil}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-yąʔ-/-yąpa-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These suffixes are a fairly recent innovation, originating in compound verbs with &#039;&#039;&#039;ćiye-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;want&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;tańa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;must, should&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;yąpa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;be capable of&#039; as their second element. (The directionals and the causative were still partly derivational at that time, which explains the position of the modal affixes right in the middle of the verbal complex.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mono- and disyllabic variants of the obligative and abilitative suffixes are selected mainly on a prosodic basis: The modal suffix always receives secondary stress, and thus prefers to be in an even-numbered syllable counting from the end of the verb. However, only the disyllabic forms are seen before the direct participation evidential, and only the monosyllabic forms are seen before the assumed and hearsay evidentials. The abilitative is also always monosyllabic before the non-visual sensory evidential.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that modal suffixes may not occur in verbs with an [[#Noun incorporation|incorporated noun]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Evidentials ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has a set of six verbal suffixes indicating the nature of the evidence supporting a statement. These morphemes are not obligatory; however, the lack of an evidential in a main clause not marked as interrogative or irrealis is usually taken as a sign of pure speculation and thus likely to raise suspicions about the statement&#039;s truth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* direct participation or general knowledge ({{sc|dir}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔo-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; before prevocalic plosives, nasals and glides, and sometimes also before consonant clusters depending on the prosodic structure of the word)&lt;br /&gt;
* visual sensory ({{sc|vis}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ya-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* non-visual sensory ({{sc|sens}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-pǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039; (causing nasalization of following approximants)&lt;br /&gt;
* inferred from physical or situational evidence ({{sc|evid}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-loʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;loʔk-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a nasal or sibilant)&lt;br /&gt;
* assumed ({{sc|ass}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-kwe-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;-p-&#039;&#039;&#039; when preceded by a vowel and followed by a prevocalic plosive)&lt;br /&gt;
* hearsay ({{sc|rep}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-mą-&#039;&#039;&#039; (causing nasalization of following approximants)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Participant marking ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ verbs exhibit polypersonal agreement with their primary absolutive arguments as well as with the ergative arguments of transitive verbs. Ditransitive verbs normally agree with the theme, not the recipient. However, verbs with an applicative prefix inflect for the applicativized absolutive element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Participant marking can be broken down in two distinct sets of affixes, with the ergative marker (if present) preceding the absolutive marker. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The underlying ergative agreement suffixes are &#039;&#039;&#039;-ɴ-&#039;&#039;&#039; (i.e. nasalization of the preceding vowel) for 1st singular, &#039;&#039;&#039;-nę-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 1st plural, &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćeh-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 2nd singular, &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćęh-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 2nd plural, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-k-&#039;&#039;&#039; (no number distinction) for 3rd/4th person agents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The underlying absolutive markers are &#039;&#039;&#039;-na-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 1st person, &#039;&#039;&#039;-tah-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 2nd person (both with a nasalized vowel for plural referents), and the regular set of classifiers for 3rd/4th person participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of sound changes, specific combinations of these agreement markers have become quite fusional; the full set of pronominal suffixes is therefore given in the table below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | ergative →&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | none&amp;amp;nbsp;(intr.)&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;13&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | 3p/4p&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | absolutive ↓&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
| {{sc|nas}}-/-ne-/-ę- || -nna- || -nę- || -ćehna- || -ćęhna- || -kna-/-ką&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
| -ną- || -nną- || -nęną- || -ćehną- || -ćęhną- || -kną-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
| -ta(h)- || {{sc|nas}}-ta(h)- || -nęta(h)- || -ćta(h)- || -ćęhta- || -kta(h)-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
| -tą(h)- || {{sc|nas}}-tą(h)- || -nętą(h)- || -ćtą(h)- || -ćęhtą- || -ktą(h)-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;7&amp;quot; | 3p/4p&lt;br /&gt;
! class=&amp;quot;r&amp;quot; | class I&lt;br /&gt;
| -ho-/-ma-/-wa- || {{sc|del}}-ǫma-/-neho || -nęma- || -ćeho- || -ćęhma- || -kwa-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class II&lt;br /&gt;
| -ta- || {{sc|nas}}-ta- || -nęta- || -ćehta- || -ćęhta- || -kta-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class III&lt;br /&gt;
| -ńǫ- || -ńńǫ- || -nęńǫ- || -ćehńǫ- || -ćęhńǫ- || -kńǫ-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class IV&lt;br /&gt;
| -hke-/-ki-/-ki- || {{sc|nas}}-ki- || -nęki- || -ćehke- || -ćęhke- || -kahke-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class V&lt;br /&gt;
| -će- || {{sc|nas}}-će- || -nęće- || -ćehće- || -ćęhće- || -kće-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class VI&lt;br /&gt;
| -ye-/-ńe-/-ye- || {{sc|del}}-ęńe- || -nęńe- || -ćehye- || -ćęhńe- || -kye-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class VII&lt;br /&gt;
| -se- || {{sc|nas}}-ce- || -nęce- || -ćesse- || -ćęhce- || -kse-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lexically intransitive verbs with an applicative prefix, two &amp;quot;absolutive intransitive&amp;quot; markers may be combined if both arguments of the verb are 3rd person, but belong to different noun classes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Where several variants for the intransitive form are given, the first is used after oral vowels, the second is used after nasal vowels, and the third is used after consonants (e.g. when preceded by the inferred evidential &#039;&#039;&#039;-loʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
* When following a consonant other than /t ts tʃ k ʔ/, the 3/4p.I intransitive marker simplifies to &#039;&#039;&#039;-o-&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* When following a consonant, all &amp;quot;{{sc|nas}}&amp;quot; in the {{sc|1sg.erg}} column are replaced by the overt vowel &#039;&#039;&#039;-ę-&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The {{sc|1sg.erg}}&amp;gt;3/4p.I.{{sc|abs}} suffix is {{sc|del}}&#039;&#039;&#039;-ǫma-&#039;&#039;&#039; only if another morpheme follows. In word-final position it is &#039;&#039;&#039;-neho&#039;&#039;&#039; instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* Likewise, the 3/4p.{{sc|erg&amp;gt;1sg.abs}} suffix is &#039;&#039;&#039;-kna&#039;&#039;&#039; if another morpheme follows, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-ką&#039;&#039;&#039; when word-final.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that the preceding vowel is deleted before adding this suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|nas}} indicates that the preceding vowel is nasalized.&lt;br /&gt;
* The bracketed (h) in the 2nd person absolutive series vanishes when word-final or preceding a glottal consonant.&lt;br /&gt;
* Most of the 3/4p absolutive morphemes (excepting those for classes III and VI and those of the 3rd/4th person ergative series) drop their final vowel when followed by another morpheme that does not start with a consonant cluster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aspect, negation and speech act markers ===&lt;br /&gt;
Two aspectual morphemes have been grammaticalized in Tmaśareʔ. The completive aspect indicates that the action described by the verb has been or will be successfully completed, and the progressive aspect indicates that the action was/is/will be ongoing at the time of reference. Both of these aspects are relatively rare in main clauses, but common in subordinated clauses. Verb forms unmarked for aspect do not specify the status of completion and usually have a generic habitual or aorist meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* completive ({{sc|cpl}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-mo-&#039;&#039;&#039; or {{sc|del}}&#039;&#039;&#039;-ǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* progressive ({{sc|prog}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-kiʔ(k)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Verbs can be negated with a negative suffix, which indicates that the action did not occur, or that it is not expected to happen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* negative ({{sc|neg}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ye&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;-(i)hma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, non-declarative speech acts may be marked with suffixes that appear at the very end of the verb. Their use is fairly straightforward: The interrogative is used in questions, and the irrealis is used in conditional clauses, when referring to hypothetical or future events, and in imperative statements. Both the interrogative and the irrealis do not usually co-occur with evidentiality marking; however, the latter is not ungrammatical, and some specific combinations are not all that rare (for instance, the irrealis combined with the assumed evidential signals a conditional clause).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* interrogative ({{sc|q}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-wi&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* irrealis ({{sc|irr}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔi&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In theory, the suffixes for aspect, negation and speech act occupy different slots in the verbal template. However, the degree of fusion is such that their surface forms depend rather strongly on contiguous affixes, and the negative morpheme even has a suppletive variant in some circumstances. For convenience, the following tables list all possible combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;fl c&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-right:1em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c fl}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! polarity →&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; | affirmative &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! aspect →&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; generic &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | completive&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | progressive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! speech act ↓&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! declarative&lt;br /&gt;
| -Ø || -mo || -kiʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! interrogative&lt;br /&gt;
| -wi/-mi || {{sc|del}}-ǫmi || -kiʔkwi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! irrealis&lt;br /&gt;
| -ʔi || {{sc|del}}-ǫʔi || -kiʔki&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;fl c&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-right:1em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c fl}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! polarity →&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; | negative&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! aspect →&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; generic &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | completive&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | progressive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! speech act ↓&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! declarative&lt;br /&gt;
| -(i)hma || {{sc|del}}-ǫńe || -kiʔće&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! interrogative&lt;br /&gt;
| -yewi/-hmawi || {{sc|del}}-ǫńewi || -kiʔćewi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! irrealis&lt;br /&gt;
| -yeʔi/-hmaʔi || {{sc|del}}-ǫńeʔi || -kiʔćeʔi&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;visualClear&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that the preceding vowel is deleted before adding this suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
* The generic aspect negative marker is usually &#039;&#039;&#039;-hma&#039;&#039;&#039;, but the vowels /a e/ in preceding 3/4p absolutive markers for classes I, II, IV, V, and VII are changed to /i/. In the interrogative and irrealis, the forms with &#039;&#039;&#039;-hma-&#039;&#039;&#039; are used in verbs with a 1st or 2nd person absolutive participant, and the forms with &#039;&#039;&#039;-ye-&#039;&#039;&#039; in verbs with a 3rd person absolutive participant.&lt;br /&gt;
* The generic aspect interrogative marker is &#039;&#039;&#039;-wi&#039;&#039;&#039; after consonants and oral vowels, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-mi&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasal vowels.&lt;br /&gt;
* Both &#039;&#039;&#039;-(i)hma&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔi&#039;&#039;&#039; drop their initial glottal consonant if the preceding syllable contains coda /h/.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Verbal nouns ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several distinct types of verb nominalization in Tmaśareʔ; most of these work on the lexical level and will be covered in the derivation section below. However, one such formation, simply called the &#039;&#039;verbal noun&#039;&#039; ({{sc|vn}}), features prominently in subordinate clauses and therefore warrants a discussion here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Verbal nouns are formed with the suffix &#039;&#039;&#039;-mę&#039;&#039;&#039;, appended to a verb that may be fully inflected, but will usually not even take evidentiality markers or, for intransitive verbs, participant suffixes. Instead, subjects of intransitive verbs and agents of transitive verbs are specified by prefixes that are identical in form to the possessive prefixes for inalienably possessed nouns. Patients or themes of transitive verbs as well as applied objects of applicative verbs take normal absolutive agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subclauses, all arguments of verbal nouns may be overtly present as noun phrases, with the subject marked for the genitive instead of the ergative or absolutive case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ćehpo ćośśatmę&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo-Ø ć-ośśa-ta-mę&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS 2SG.POSS-kill-3.II-VN&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;your killing of the deer&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;macoʔ ecwayahcnąmę&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;maci-oʔ e-cwaya-hca-ną-mę&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;bear-GEN 3SG.POSS-fight-towards-1PL-VN&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the bear&#039;s attack on us&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Derivation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ does not have a separate class of adjectives, and only a small number of lexical adverbs. It makes up for this with a large number of derivational morphemes that can be used to create new words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjectival prefixes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectival prefixes can be added to almost any nominal, including pronouns. They cover a wide range of attributive meanings, which may be stacked upon each other if the combination makes sense semantically. The list is too large to be given here; adjectival prefixes are therefore found in the lexicon.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With nouns, adjectival prefixes are added before the (possibly plural-marked) stem, but after any possessive or demonstrative prefixes. With pronouns they appear at the beginning of the word, even with correlative pronouns that include a deictic morpheme in their stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;mahkapsanǫ&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;mahka=psanǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;sharp=knife&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;a sharp knife&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;śekcehkpehkekehka&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śe=kceh=kpeh=ke~kehka&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this=dirty=dry=PL~rock&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;these dirty dry rocks&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Cmaʔoʔoha rohkeya wekco twehalloʔkahke.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;cma=o~oha-Ø roh=keya-Ø wek-co twe-hala-loʔ-kahke&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;red=PL~bean-ABS good=soil-ABS quick-ADV LOC-grow-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.IV&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Red beans grow quickly in good soil.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The meaning of adjectival prefixes can be reversed by adding &#039;&#039;&#039;i-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;iʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; before vowels), and intensified by adding &#039;&#039;&#039;cpo-&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;icictoca&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;i=cic=toca&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;not=centrally_located=house&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;a house at the edge of the village&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;nacpokahtomina&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-cpo=kahto=mina&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-very=gentle=mother&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;my affectionate mother&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derivational suffixes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second set of derivational morphemes consists of suffixes that change the meaning of a root, instead of adding an attributive property. These suffixes are stem extensions; that is, they are added after the root (often with deletion of a vowel), forming a new stem that inflects according to the vowel in the suffix. Interestingly, some of these morphemes contain an &amp;quot;echo vowel&amp;quot;, i.e. a copy of the original thematic vowel. When combined with vowel deletion, such suffixes look like an infix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following symbols are used in the tables below:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that a preceding vowel is deleted unless the resulting cluster would be illegal.&lt;br /&gt;
* V represents an echo copy of the underlying stem vowel. If bracketed, it appears only word-finally.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ṽ stands for a copy of an underlying nasalized stem vowel.&lt;br /&gt;
* A bracketed final (h) does not appear before &#039;&#039;&#039;ʔ h&#039;&#039;&#039; or word-finally, and it coalesces with following prevocalic &#039;&#039;&#039;s ś&#039;&#039;&#039; into a geminate version of the latter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Nominalizers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg4 bold&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| suffix || usage || etymology &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-cV-&#039;&#039;&#039; / {{sc|del}}&#039;&#039;&#039;-ęńṼ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, agent nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-dayV-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;ćihtaca&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;mentor&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;ćihta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;teach&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-nǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, instrument nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-dzũ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;meʔśonǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;needle&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;meʔśo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;sew&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-mę-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, action nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-γʷĩ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;mihmę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;absence, omission&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;mihe-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;be absent&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ha-&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;-Ṽna-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, result nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-ła-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;polaha&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;gift&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;pola-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;donate&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-pV-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, patient/theme nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | {{gray|&amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-pV-&#039;&#039;}} &amp;lt;!--(as in PW &#039;&#039;*yatʰapa&#039;&#039; &#039;garden&#039; ← &#039;&#039;*yatʰa-&#039;&#039; &#039;cultivate&#039;)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;lǫćpa&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;trade item&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;lǫća-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;exchange, trade, share&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ńę-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N → N, goal/recipient nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-γẽ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;pątańę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;goal, target, destination&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;pąta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;reach for&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-ma-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, location nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*ma&#039;&#039; &#039;place&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;śeʔtama&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;channel, ditch, moat&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;śeʔta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;flow&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-laho-&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;-namṼ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, related male person&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-lawV-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;comalaho&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;storyteller&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;coma&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;story, legend&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-kę-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, related female person&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-kĩ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kwelkę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;girl&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kwela&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;child&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-kV(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, related thing&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-kʰa-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;yećka&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;quiver&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;yeći&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;arrow&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-sso-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N → N, object made of X&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-słu-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tolasso&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;thread, twine&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;tola&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;wool&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-cǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N → N, collective (only with animals &amp;amp; plants)&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-cũ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kwohcǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;pack of wolves&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kwoho&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;wolf&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-to-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre/Adv → N, abstraction, collective&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-tu-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;cohto&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;courage, energy&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;coh-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;strong, manly&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Verbalizers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg4 bold&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| suffix || usage || etymology || example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔyV-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre → V, stative verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-ʔayV-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;otwaʔya-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;resemble, match&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;otwa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;similar&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-hpa-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre → V, dynamic verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-łpa-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kayahpa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;burn&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kaya&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;fire&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-ta(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/Pre → V, dynamic verbalizer (intensive, factitive)&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*tʰa-&#039;&#039; &#039;do, make&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kolta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;gouge, drill, pierce&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kolo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hole&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔna-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/V → V, permissive/factitive verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*ʔẽdza-&#039;&#039; &#039;give&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;eniʔna-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;entrust to&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;eni-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;be equipped with&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćka-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre → V, durative verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*čeka-&#039;&#039; &#039;sit&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;yeyaćka-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;listen to&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;yeya-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hear&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-twi(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → V, inchoative/evolutive verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*tʰuya-&#039;&#039; &#039;become&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kpehtwi-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;become dry&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kpeh-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;dry&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other derivational morphology ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg4 bold&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| suffix || usage || etymology || example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-co-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/V/Pre → Adv, general adverbializer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-cu-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;yelco&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;else, otherwise&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;yel-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;different&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-hą-&#039;&#039;&#039; / ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-ną-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/Pre → Adv, manner adverbializer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*łãγa&#039;&#039; &#039;spirit&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;śaʔną&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;intentionally, on purpose&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;śaʔę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;mind&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-męt(V)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/PP → Adv, directional/purposive adverbializer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*γʷĩta&#039;&#039; &#039;wind&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;nokmęti&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;backwards, the other way around&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;noki-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;turn (sth.)&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compounding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compounding is a highly productive device to create new lexical items. Almost all content morphemes can be freely combined head-finally, provided the head is a noun or a verb. Adpositions can also be the head of a compound; however, this is not quite as productive and happens only when the modifier is an adposition or particle. Compounds of more than two parts can always be decomposed into smaller binary head-final compounds. In theory, arbitrarily long words are possible with this strategy, but Tmaśareʔ speakers tend not to create lexical stems consisting of more than four or five distinct lexical morphemes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;hapaʔtkwoćę&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hapaʔta-kwoćę&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;shoot-sinew&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;bow&#039;&#039; (n.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;eńopaho-&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;eńo-paho-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;again-walk&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;return&#039;&#039; (v.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ syntax is mostly left-branching, with postpositions, modifiers preceding their heads, and basic &#039;&#039;&#039;SOV&#039;&#039;&#039; word order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The noun phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Simple noun phrases ===&lt;br /&gt;
A noun phrase consists of a nominal head, optionally preceded by one or more modifiers (numerals, other noun phrases, postpositional phrases, or relative clauses). The heads of modifying NPs are cast in the genitive case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;hąse&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hąse-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;horse-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;a horse&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;soʔ kakca&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-oʔ ka~kaca-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-GEN PL~friend-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;our friends&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;aśǫʔ etęʔpi&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;aśę-oʔ e-tęʔpi-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;woman-GEN 3SG.POSS-daughter-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the woman&#039;s daughter&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kahpoʔ laʔ orata kąʔmera&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kahpa-oʔ laʔ ora-ta-Ø kąʔ=mera-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;tree-GEN under five-CL.II-ABS black=dog-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the five black dogs under the tree&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Postpositional phrases ===&lt;br /&gt;
A postpositional phrase is made up of a postposition, preceded by a noun phrase in the genitive case. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;cǫńąkoʔ mnąʔco&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;cǫ=yąki-oʔ mnąʔco&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;long=river-GEN downward&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;down along the long river&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tkwoʔ tnęcpątanǫʔ śe&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;tkwe-oʔ t=nęc=pątanǫ-oʔ śe&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2PL-GEN that=straight=road-GEN via&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;by means of that straight road of yours&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordinated phrases ===&lt;br /&gt;
Noun phrases can be coordinated with a number of conjunctions, which behave like enclitics attaching to the head of the last phrase to be coordinated. The most relevant phrase-joining conjunctions are &#039;&#039;&#039;=ʔma&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;and&amp;quot;, &#039;&#039;&#039;=so&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;or&amp;quot;, &#039;&#039;&#039;=śo&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;neither/nor&amp;quot;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;=ća&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;either/or&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;yoma mahńę śeśehoʔma&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yoma-Ø mahńę-Ø śe~śeho-Ø=ʔma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;sun-ABS moon-ABS PL~star-ABS=and&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;sun, moon, and stars&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;nǫńoći kńąhkwitaso&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;nǫ-yoći-Ø kńąh-kwita-Ø=so&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;thick=fish-ABS thin=OBV.II.SG-ABS=or&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the fat fish or the thin one&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The clause ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intransitive clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive clauses minimally consist of an inflected verb with an absolutive agreement marker. The subject NP, which may be omitted if reference is clear from context, takes the absolutive case and normally precedes the verb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yeleʔcoʔǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yele-ʔco-ʔo-ɴ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;run-away-DIR-1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I run away.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hora oleyahmo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hora-Ø ole-ya-ho-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;chief-ABS die-VIS-3.I-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The chief has died.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transitive clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Transitive clauses may take two or three core arguments (with mono- and ditransitive verbs respectively). All overt arguments must be placed on the same side of the verb, usually before it, with agents (marked with the ergative case) coming first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In monotransitive clauses, the verb is inflected to agree with both its arguments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyassǫ kęhtaʔǫtkiʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;keyassǫ-Ø kęhta-ʔo-ɴta-kiʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;wall-ABS build-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II-PROG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I am building a wall.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Maciʔ ńęʔka coheloʔkće.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;maci-eʔ ńęʔka-Ø cohe-loʔ-kće&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;bear-ERG honey-ABS find-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.V&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The bear finds honey.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Toʔ cǫccoʔ tohnęʔ naʔaśę olcamąkwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-oʔ cǫcca-oʔ tohną-eʔ na-aśę-Ø olca-mą-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-GEN family-GEN headman-ERG 1SG.POSS-wife-ABS hit-REP-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The headman of your family hit my wife!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ditransitive clauses have three arguments, two of them in the absolutive case. Only the agent and the primary object (typically in the semantic role of theme) will be marked on the verb; the secondary object (typically the recipient) does not trigger agreement. If both objects are represented in the clause by overt noun phrases, the secondary object NP precedes the primary object NP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Sohceʔ eʔaśę ećąke enayakta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sohca-eʔ e-aśę-Ø e-ćąke-Ø ena-ya-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;hunter-ERG 3SG.POSS-wife-ABS 3SG.POSS-skin-ABS give-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The hunter gives his wife its skin.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ditransitive clauses need not contain a lexically ditransitive verb though. They can also be formed by adding an applicative or causative marker to a monotransitive verb stem. The former operation promotes an oblique object to the primary object slot, the latter adds an agent in the ergative slot. In both cases, the displaced argument will be demoted to secondary object, ceasing to trigger agreement on the verb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwelkęʔ cocwa nǫćeyąsa meksoppeyeloʔktakiʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwelkę-eʔ co~cowa-Ø nǫće-yąsa-Ø mek-soppeye-loʔ-kta-kiʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;girl-ERG PL~fruit-ABS evening-meal-ABS BEN-gather-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.II-PROG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The girl is collecting fruit for dinner.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Teʔ na toca ćeltaraʔćessemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-eʔ na-Ø toca-Ø ćelta-ra-ʔo-ćesse-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-ERG 1SG-ABS house-ABS see-CAUS-DIR-2SG&amp;gt;3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;You showed me the house (lit. You made me see the house).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special type of monotransitive clause is formed when an intransitive verb is applicativized: the resulting clause will contain two absolutive-marked arguments but no ergative-marked one. In such clauses, the verb takes &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; agreement referring to the non-applied absolutive (i.e. the subject). If both arguments are 3rd person, but belong to different noun classes, absolutive markers are used for both - with the marker for the subject first and for the applied object second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Na kpahcǫ twepahoʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-Ø kpahcǫ-Ø twe-paho-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ABS forest-ABS LOC-walk-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I walk in the forest.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Heńaho malekehkwi kyehcakwessemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;heńaho-Ø male-kehkwi-Ø k-ye-hca-kwe-ho-se-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;priest-ABS sea-sand-ABS LAT-go-towards-ASS-3.I-3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The priest has gone to the seashore, I believe.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ is a pro-drop language; verbal arguments may be left out in transitive sentences just like in intransitive ones. Both agent and patient/theme may be omitted; however, applied objects may only be dropped if there is no other overt absolutive argument, and recipients may not be dropped at all. Monotransitive and applicative clauses therefore minimally consist of an inflected verb, whereas true ditransitives will always have at least one overt argument NP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kohpątaʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kohpa-ɴtah-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;follow-1SG&amp;gt;2SG-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I will follow you.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Tweśikąńahose.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;twe-śiką-ya-ho-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;LOC-stand-VIS-3.I-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He is standing there.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Napcaha ćihtaʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-pcaha-Ø ćihta-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-boy-ABS teach-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I&#039;m teaching it to my son.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Predication ===&lt;br /&gt;
Nominal or adjectivial predicates do not exist as a distinct clause type in Tmaśareʔ. Predication is achieved via ordinary clauses, using a wide variety of verbalizing suffixes that attach to the predicated nominal, adpositional, or adjectivial stem. The most common verbalizers used in predication are &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔyV-&#039;&#039;&#039; (stative/gnomic), &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćka-&#039;&#039;&#039; (durative/situational), and &#039;&#039;&#039;-twi(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039; (evolutive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Na ćtohnąʔńaʔǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-Ø će-tohną-ʔyV-ʔo-ɴ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ABS 2SG.POSS-father-be-DIR-1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I am your father.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Saye tahnatwihpǫse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;saye-Ø tahna-twih-pǫ-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;night-ABS cold-become-SENS-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;It&#039;s getting cold tonight.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositional predicates normally occur in the form of applicative constructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćaćahkwoho soʔ toca tweyoćkapǫtase.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ća~ćahkwoho-Ø sa-oʔ toca-Ø twe-yo-ćka-pǫ-ta-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PL~hyaena-ABS 1PL-GEN house-ABS LOC-outside-DUR-SENS-3.II-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Hyaenae are outside our house.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yąsa mekihmahtaʔǫta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yąsa-Ø mek-ihma-hta-ʔo-ɴta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;food-ABS INSTR-without-RES-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I don&#039;t have any food (lit. I have ended up without food).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adverbs ===&lt;br /&gt;
A clause may optionally take one or more adjuncts, most commonly adverbs or postpositional phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postpositional adjuncts normally follow the verb, though they may be fronted to sentence-initial position when topicalized. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwela kahkwapǫmakiʔ lǫńomoʔ laʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwela-Ø kahkwa-pǫ-ma-kiʔ lǫ-yoma-oʔ laʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;child-ABS laugh-SENS-3.I-PROG warm=sun-GEN under&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The child is laughing in the sunlight.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbial adjuncts may appear almost anywhere in a sentence (but not between the two absolutive complements of a ditransitive clause); they are most commonly found right after the head of the first NP in the clause (Wackernagel&#039;s position). If the adjunct is a clause, it may occur initially or finally, but not in between other elements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hitkweleʔ wekco kahpa tahmorayakse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hit=kwela-eʔ wek-co kahpa-Ø tahmo-ra-ya-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;small=child-ERG quick-ADV tree-ABS fall-CAUS-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The little child quickly felled the tree.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kahkwaco, yokwoʔ toca kayahpamąsemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kahkwa-co, yokwe-oʔ toca-Ø kayahpa-mą-se-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;laugh-ADV PROX.I.PL-GEN house-ABS burn-REP-3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Amusingly, their house burnt down.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pcaheʔ toʔ mǫńo laʔpaloʔktaʔi oca.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;pcaha-eʔ ta-oʔ me~meńo-Ø laʔpa-loʔ-kta-ʔi oca&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;boy-ERG 2SG-GEN PL~sheep-ABS steal-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.II-IRR day_after_tomorrow&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The day after tomorrow the boy will try to steal your sheep.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Discourse particles ===&lt;br /&gt;
Discourse particles function a lot like sentential adverbs in that they commonly occur after the first phrase in a clause (or clause-initially if there are no overt participants or fronted adjuncts). Unlike true adverbs, however, they may not be moved to other positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Sa kehće yemahcaʔną.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-Ø kehće yema-hca-ʔo-ną&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ABS instead row-forward-DIR-1PL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Instead, we rowed onwards.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śeheʔ kwe hanelćoma wecokwektaʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śeho-eʔ kwe ha=nelćoma-Ø weco-kwe-kta-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this.I.SG-ERG but all=mushroom-ABS eat-ASS-3&amp;gt;3.II-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;But I&#039;m sure that he will eat all the mushrooms!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Questions are formed by inflecting the verb for the interrogative mood. If a specific sentence constituent is being asked about, an interrogative pronoun or a query proclitic will be used in addition to verbal inflection. No wh-movement takes place. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wila ćiyećehwi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;wi=la-Ø ćiye-ćeho-wi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Q=man-ABS want-2SG&amp;gt;3.I-Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Which man do you like?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Twi kwoho sohoćehtǫmi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;twi kwoho-Ø soho-ćehta-ǫmi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;yesterday wolf-ABS catch-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL:Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Did you catch the wolf yesterday?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śeheʔ, kwoho twi sohoktǫmi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śeho-eʔ, kwoho-Ø twi soho-kta-ǫmi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this.I-ERG, wolf-ABS yesterday catch-3&amp;gt;3.II-CPL:Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Was it him who caught the wolf yesterday?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wita roʔ teʔ twi sohoćehtǫmi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;wita-Ø roʔ ta-eʔ twi soho-ćehta-ǫmi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;what.II-ABS therefore 2SG-ERG yesterday catch-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL:Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;What did you catch yesterday then?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Serial verb constructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ permits two kinds of verb serialization that appear to work within a single syntactic clause. The first of these looks like verb-verb compounding on the morphological level, but its semantics are different in that it portrays several distinct actions as happening simultaneously, and being performed by the same participants. This type of construction works only for verbs that would share the exact same morphology (including derivational suffixes) when free-standing. This morphology is used only once, with all the verb roots combined into a single composite stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kana ćawińęsaśętayaho.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kana-Ø ćawi=ńęsa=śęta-ya-ho&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;group_of_people-ABS smile=dance=sing-VIS-3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The group of people laughed and danced and sang (all at the same time).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second type of verb serialization, which is formed by simply concatenating several fully inflected verbs with the clitic conjunction &#039;&#039;&#039;=ʔma&#039;&#039;&#039; added to the last verb in the chain, does not require identical morphology, and is thus much more flexible. However, it still requires identical morphologically relevant participants. When contrasted against the compositional method of serial verb formation, it portrays the actions as closely linked but non-simultaneous, following each other in short succession.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kana ćawiyaho ńęsayaho śętayahoʔma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kana-Ø ćawi-ya-ho ńęsa-ya-ho śęta-ya-ho=ʔma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;group_of_people-ABS smile-VIS-3.I dance-VIS-3.I sing-VIS-3.I=and&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The group of people laughed, then they danced, and then they sang.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Complex sentences ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordinate clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinate clauses are formed with a conjunction, which is inserted right after the head of the first phrase in the second clause. If that clause does not contain an overt NP, or if the first NP is modified by a relative clause, the conjunction is added between the two coordinated clauses instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Weye kpahohcmąkse tma ca twekęhtatocamąksemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;weye-Ø k-paho-hca-mą-kse t=ma-Ø ca twe-kęhta-&amp;lt;toca&amp;gt;-mą-kse-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;hill-ABS LAT-walk-towards-REP-3&amp;gt;3.VII that=place-ABS and LOC-build-&amp;lt;house&amp;gt;-REP-3&amp;gt;3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They say he went up the hill and built a house there.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Teʔ maci cohećehtwi, ćehahoʔ aro so wetaʔcotkiʔkwi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-eʔ maci-Ø cohe-ćehta-wi, će-ha~ha-oʔ aro so weta-ʔco-ta-kiʔk-wi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-ERG bear-ABS discover-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-Q, 2SG.POSS-PL~eye-GEN from or turn-away-3.II-PROG-Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Did you see the bear, or was it hiding from your eyes?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the two conjoined clauses have the same topic appearing in different roles, pronouns will be used to clarify. In the following example, the horse is both topic and patient in both clauses, but the verb of the first clause is applicativized, which demotes the horse from primary to secondary absolutive. Accordingly, the pronoun &#039;&#039;&#039;yata&#039;&#039;&#039; is used in primary absolutive position to indicate that the second clause focuses on the horse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Teʔ hąse ćopńę kyehcasćesseʔi, yata śeʔ siśęnaćehtihma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-eʔ hąse-Ø ćopńę-Ø k-ye-hca-s-ćesse-ʔi, yata-Ø śeʔ siśę-na-ćehta-ihma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-ERG horse-ABS water_place-ABS LAT-move-towards-CAUS-2SG&amp;gt;3.VII-IRR, PROX.II.SG-ABS however drink-CAUS-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-NEG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;You can lead a horse to water, but you can&#039;t make it drink.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next sentence, note the seemingly reversed use of proximative and obviative pronouns. By referring to the chief with the proximative even though he is not the subject of the transitive first clause, it becomes possible to track him as the subject of the intransitive second clause without having to use an overt resumptive pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwakwiʔ yaho ińeʔnahorapǫkwa tǫ sǫskwacolaćkaloʔwa ceʔkoʔ sąʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwakwe-eʔ yaho-Ø ińe-ʔna=hora-pǫ-kwa tǫ sǫs=kwaco-la-ćka-loʔ-wa ceʔka-oʔ sąʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;OBV.I.PL-ERG PROX.I.SG-ABS name-FACT=chief-SENS-3&amp;gt;3.I because primary=strength-man-DUR-EVID-3.I tribe-GEN in&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They chose him as chief because they considered him the bravest man in the tribe (lit. because he was obviously the man with the greatest amount of &#039;&#039;&#039;kwaco&#039;&#039;&#039;).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Relative clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses precede their antecedents. They are formed with an introductory pronoun agreeing in noun class and number with the relativized nominal - usually a demonstrative, but indefinite quantifying pronouns and ordinary 3rd/4th person pronouns are also seen. The relativized noun itself may be preceded by a deictic proclitic for emphasis or disambiguation; if the relative clause is introduced with a 3rd/4th person pronoun and the relativized noun is not possessed, this deictic is mandatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no syntactic or inflectional difference between stand-alone relative clauses and full main clauses, except that the introductory pronoun in relative clauses may not be omitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śehke soppeyeʔnękmo yolći kwisayakahke.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śehke-Ø soppeye-ʔo-nęki-mo yolći-Ø kwisa-ya-kahke&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this.IV.SG-ABS gather-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.IV-CPL millet-ABS grind-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.IV&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;She is grinding the millet that we gathered.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yaho na cwihoraʔką śeleʔ namina yaśiloʔkwihma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yaho-Ø na-Ø ca-wihora-ʔo-ką śe=la-eʔ na-mina-Ø yaśi-loʔ-kwa-ihma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.SG-ABS 1SG-ABS BEN-give_birth-DIR-3&amp;gt;1SG this=man-ERG 1SG.POSS-mother-ABS marry-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.I-NEG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The man who fathered me did not marry my mother.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In relative clauses introduced with a quantifier, the meaning is partitive if a demonstrative proclitic is added to the relativized noun. If no demonstrative is present, the quantity is absolute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kweʔ cwayayakta śeleʔ na twihke enaʔkahke roʔoha hą kwekmǫkiʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwa-eʔ cwaya-ya-kta śe=la-eʔ na-Ø twihke-Ø ena-ʔo-kahke ra-o~oha-Ø hą kwekwo-ɴki-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;OBV.I.SG-ERG fight-VIS-3&amp;gt;2SG this=man-ERG 1SG-ABS some.IV-ABS give-DIR-3&amp;gt;3.IV that=PL~bean-ABS then cook-1SG&amp;gt;3.IV-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I might as well cook some of those beans that the man who I saw fight you gave to me.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oblique arguments cannot be relativized directly, and relativized nouns cannot take an oblique syntactic role within the relative clause either. Both situations are resolved by using applicative verbs, which promote the applied object to the core absolutive slot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Seʔ hahąse śeśi twećeltaʔnęcmo olco keńopahcaʔnęce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-eʔ ha~hąse-Ø śeśi-Ø twe-ćelta-ʔo-nęce-mo olco-Ø k-eńopaho-hca-ʔo-nęce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ERG PL~horse-ABS this.VII.SG-ABS LOC-see-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.VII-CPL location-ABS LAT-return-towards-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We went back to the place where we saw the horses.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Complement clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Complement clauses are typically formed as a verbal noun, with agents and intransitive subjects being agreed with by means of nominal possessive prefixes instead of the usual verbal participant suffixes. (Transitive patients are still marked on the verb in the normal fashion though.) Any overt subject or agent in a complement clause appears in the genitive case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The complementized verb itself is treated as a class VII noun for any agreement purposes in the matrix clause. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćośśahomęʔ ahparaʔką.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ć-ośśa-ho-mę-eʔ ahpara-ʔo-ką&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG.POSS-kill-3.I-VN-ERG anger-DIR-3&amp;gt;1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;That you killed him angers me.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Emineʔ etęʔpi ececemę ćihtayakse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;e-mina-eʔ e-tęʔpi-Ø e-cece-mę-Ø ćihta-ya-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3SG.POSS-mother-ERG 3SG.POSS-daughter-ABS 3SG.POSS-prepare_leather-VN-ABS teach-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The mother teaches her daughter to prepare leather.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second type of complement clause is formed like an ordinary main clause that follows the matrix verb, and is itself terminated with the {{sc|prox.VII.sg}} pronoun &#039;&#039;&#039;yaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;. This construction is preferred in situations where the subclause contains several overt participants and/or adjuncts, but it can only be used in the primary absolutive role of non-applicativized verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yekonęceʔi sorohca eńopahcayahmo weweloʔ aro ląsćehącǫʔ oma yaśe.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yeko-nęce-ʔi so~sohca-Ø eńopaho-hca-ya-ho-mo we~weli-oʔ aro ląc=ćehącǫ-oʔ oma yaśe-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;honor-1PL&amp;gt;3.VII-IRR PL~hunter-ABS return-towards-VIS-3.I-CPL PL~mountain-GEN from much=game-GEN with PROX.VII.SG-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Let us celebrate that the hunters have returned from the mountains with a good catch.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adverbial clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbial clauses are formed with a nominalized verb as the object of a postposition. As with nominalized complement clauses, overt subjects of the subclause are cast in the genitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ikpahohcamomǫʔ oma pahoʔconąʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ik-paho-hca-mo-mę-oʔ oma paho-ʔco-ną-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2PL.POSS-walk-towards-CPL-VN-GEN with walk-away-1PL-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We will leave when you arrive.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Maci pątaʔcoʔnętamo yatoʔ ńęʔka ewecoyaćkiʔmǫʔ sąʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;maci-Ø pąta-ʔco-ʔo-nęta-mo yata-oʔ ńęʔka-Ø e-weco-ya-će-kiʔ-mę-oʔ sąʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;bear-ABS reach-away-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.II-CPL PROX.II.SG-GEN honey-ABS 3SG.POSS-eat-VIS-3.V-PROG-VN-GEN at&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We sneaked away from the bear while it was eating honey.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kńaćkamęno ćtwećekamǫʔ sąʔ, yeyeći laʔpaloʔkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kńaćka-mę-ro-Ø ć-twe-ćeka-mę-oʔ sąʔ, ye~yeći-Ø laʔpa-loʔ-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;sit.together-VN-HON-ABS 2SG.POSS-LOC-sit-VN-GEN at, PL~arrow-ABS steal-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He must have stolen the arrows when you were attending the village meeting.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Valence adjustment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Causativization ===&lt;br /&gt;
Causativization increases the valence of a verb by adding an agent. When added to lexically intransitive verbs where the subject is an experiencer, the [[#Causative|causative suffix]] simply adds an ergative argument, which is typically interpreted as bringing about the state that the subject is experiencing. This type of causativization can be combined with an applicative prefix, with no major effect on the semantics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwela ńępeyaho.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwela-Ø ńępe-ya-ho&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;child-ABS sleep-VIS-3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The child sleeps.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Emineʔ ekwela ńępe{{red|ra}}yakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;e-mina-eʔ e-kwela-Ø ńępe-{{red|ra}}-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3SG.POSS-mother-ERG 3SG.POSS-child-ABS sleep-{{red|CAUS}}-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The mother puts her child to sleep.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Emineʔ ekwela home meʔńępe{{red|ra}}yakse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;e-mina-eʔ e-kwela-Ø home-Ø mek-ńępe-{{red|ra}}-ya-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3SG.POSS-mother-ERG 3SG.POSS-child-ABS song-ABS INSTR-sleep-{{red|CAUS}}-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The mother puts her child to sleep with a lullaby.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to portray the causation of the described event as indirect and/or accidental, the added agent may be rendered as the object of the postposition &#039;&#039;&#039;elka&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;due to&#039; instead of appearing as a core argument in the ergative case (note the intransitive agreement suffix in the following example).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Tahmo{{red|ra}}ʔwa noʔ elka.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;tahmo-{{red|ra}}-ʔo-wa na-oʔ elka&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;fall-{{red|CAUS}}-DIR-3.I 1SG-GEN due_to&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I accidentally made him fall (lit. He was made to fall because of me).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Causativized intransitive verbs may also appear without any reference to the added agent at all. In such constructions, the verb generally takes on a permissive meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;La kipceʔ twole{{red|ra}}loʔwase.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;la-Ø kipceʔ-Ø twe-ole-{{red|ra}}-loʔ-wa-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;man-ABS desert-ABS LOC-die-{{red|CAUS}}-EVID-3.I-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The man was left to die in the desert.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lexically transitive verb undergoes causativization, the original ergative argument is demoted to a secondary object, which will appear in the absolutive case but does not trigger verbal agreement. Semantically, the demoted agent usually retains its agentive role, and the new agent is understood to have played a key role in starting the action performed by the demoted agent. Again, indirect causation may be indicated by casting the causer as an oblique argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Soleʔ aśę yaho tǫhno{{red|s}}kwekwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;solo-eʔ aśę-Ø yaho-Ø tǫhno-{{red|s}}-kwe-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;warrior-ERG woman-ABS PROX.I.SG-ABS have_sex_with-{{red|CAUS}}-ASS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The warrior forced the woman to fuck him, I guess.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Toʔ tatahkoʔ elka, na toʔ śelehe ćosą{{red|na}}pǫkse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-oʔ ta~tahka-oʔ elka, na-Ø ta-oʔ śe~śehe-Ø ćosą-{{red|na}}-pǫ-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-GEN PL~effort-GEN due_to, 1SG-ABS 2SG-GEN PL~goal-ABS be_curious_about-{{red|CAUS}}-SENS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Your actions have made me curious about your goals (lit. Because of your actions, I have been made curious about your goals).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ditransitive verbs can also be causativized. Since this creates a tetravalent verb, one of the four arguments must be expressed obliquely, either the original agent or the original secondary object. In the former case, the postpositions &#039;&#039;&#039;śe&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;via&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;nene&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;across&#039; can be used (with the second of these implying non-volitional involvement of the causee); in the latter case, the demoted secondary object may appear with almost any postposition, most typically &#039;&#039;&#039;kǫpe&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;towards&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pcahoʔ nene etohnęʔ kaca psanǫ ena{{red|s}}pǫkta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;pcaha-oʔ nene e-tohną-eʔ kaca-Ø psanǫ-Ø ena-{{red|s}}-pǫ-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;boy-GEN across 3SG.POSS-father-ERG friend-ABS knife-ABS give-{{red|CAUS}}-SENS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;His father made the boy give the knife to his friend (in spite of his objections).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ kwa kokwoho piʔehpa{{red|ra}}ʔǫtmo mǫńoʔ kǫpe.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ kwa-Ø kwo~kwoho-Ø piʔehpa-{{red|ra}}-ʔo-ɴta-mo me~meńo-oʔ kǫpe&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG OBV.I.SG-ABS PL~wolf-ABS protect_from-{{red|CAUS}}-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL PL~sheep-GEN towards&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I made him protect the sheep from wolves.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case a ditransitive verb is subject to both causativization and applicativization, it is common to incorporate the primary object into the verb in order to prevent the clause from having too many overt arguments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ kwa ćępesso mekpiʔehpa{{blue|kwoh}}{{red|ra}}ʔǫtmo mǫńoʔ kǫpe.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ kwa-Ø ćępesso-Ø mek-piʔehpa-{{blue|&amp;lt;kwoho&amp;gt;}}-{{red|ra}}-ʔo-ɴta-mo me~meńo-oʔ kǫpe&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG OBV.I.SG-ABS wooden_wall-ABS INSTR-protect_from-{{blue|&amp;lt;wolf&amp;gt;}}-{{red|CAUS}}-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL PL~sheep-GEN towards&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I made him protect the sheep from wolves by a fence (lit. I made him wolf-protect the sheep by a fence).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== De-agentivization ===&lt;br /&gt;
To deemphasize the agent of a transitive verb and consequently emphasize the patient, the agent can be omitted. Note that the verb may or may not show agreement with the agent: In the first case, the focus is simply shifted towards the absolutive argument while the verb remains transitive; in the second case, the verb is instead detransitivized by removing all reference to the agent. For most verbs, detransitivization results in a mediopassive interpretation of the event. (A full passive can be formed by re-adding the agent as an oblique argument; the semantic connection between the agent and the patient remains fairly indirect though.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Sohceʔ ćehpo wecoyakta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sohca-eʔ ćehpo-Ø weco-ya-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;hunter-ERG deer-ABS eat-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The hunter ate the deer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćehpo wecoyakta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo-Ø weco-ya-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS eat-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He ate the deer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćehpo wecoyata.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo weco-ya-ta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS eat-VIS-3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The deer was eaten.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćehpo wecoyata sohcoʔ elka.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo weco-ya-ta sohca-oʔ elka&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS eat-VIS-3.II hunter-GEN due_to&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The deer was eaten by the hunter (lit. because of the hunter).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reflexives and reciprocals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reflexives and reciprocals are not formed by valence reduction. Instead, they are expressed by using a pronoun coreferential with the agent as the primary object of the verb, which itself takes transitive agreement. Typically, an anaphoric personal pronoun is used for this purpose, often prefixed with the deictic proclitic &#039;&#039;&#039;śe=&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;this&#039; or with the adjectival prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;tąc-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;same&#039; (the former can be used for both reflexives and reciprocals, the latter for reflexives only). In 1st and 2nd person reflexives, the overt pronouns may be dropped because verbal agreement is unambiguous already.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yaheʔ (śe)yaho hesayakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yaho-eʔ (śe=)yaho-Ø hesa-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.SG-ERG (this=)PROX.I.SG-ABS cut-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He cut himself.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hesapǫnna.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hesa-pǫ-nna&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;cut-SENS-1SG&amp;gt;1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cut myself.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yokwiʔ (śe)yoʔ ćeltayakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yokwe-eʔ (śe=)yoʔ ćelta-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.PL-ERG (this=)PROX.I.PL.ABS see-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They see themselves. / They see each other.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yokwiʔ tąćoʔ ćeltayakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yokwe-eʔ tąc=yoʔ ćelta-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.PL-ERG same=PROX.I.PL.ABS see-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They see themselves (e.g. mirrored on the surface of water).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Noun incorporation ===&lt;br /&gt;
In order to deemphasize the patient and emphasize the agent, the patient can simply be omitted without valence adjustment, or it can be incorporated within the verb, which reduces the verb&#039;s valence by one and has the effect of portraying the patient as non-specific and the action as something conventionally done to patients of that sort. The incorporated object appears right after the verb stem (following any derivational morphemes but preceding suffixal inflection), and the agent is cast in the absolutive case:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ toca kęhtaʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ toca-Ø kęhta-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG house-ABS build-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I built the house.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ kęhtaʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ kęhta-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG build-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I built it.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Na kęhta{{red|toca}}ʔǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-Ø kęhta-{{red|&amp;lt;toca&amp;gt;}}-ʔo-ɴ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ABS build-{{red|&amp;lt;house&amp;gt;}}-DIR-1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I built a house (lit. I house-built).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ditransitive verbs, only the primary absolutive may be incorporated. The result is a monotransitive verb with an incorporated theme, which may then itself be detransitivized by removing the agent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Seʔ aśę pǫki enaʔnęńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-eʔ aśę-Ø pǫki-Ø ena-ʔo-nęta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ERG woman-ABS bowl-ABS give-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We gave the bowl to the woman.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Seʔ aśę ena{{red|pǫki}}ʔnęma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-eʔ aśę-Ø ena-{{red|&amp;amp;lt;pǫki&amp;gt;}}-ʔo-nęma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ERG woman-ABS give-{{red|&amp;lt;bowl&amp;gt;}}-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We gave the woman a bowl (lit. We bowl-gave the woman).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Aśę ena{{red|pǫki}}ʔwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;aśę-Ø ena-{{red|&amp;amp;lt;pǫki&amp;gt;}}-ʔo-wa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;woman-ABS give-{{red|&amp;lt;bowl&amp;gt;}}-DIR-3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The woman was given a bowl (lit. The woman was bowl-given).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicative verbs may incorporate either the patient or the applied object. However, the latter is only possible if the clause does not contain a patient (as the last two examples demonstrate), because even if noun class agreement would disambiguate in theory, any single overt absolutive argument of an applicative verb will be interpreted as the applied object. Note also that incorporated applied objects still trigger agreement on the verb, and that the agent consequently does not get promoted to absolutive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Natohnęʔ soha psanǫ mekośśamąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ soha-Ø psanǫ-Ø mek-ośśa-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG leopard-ABS knife-ABS INSTR-kill-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;My father killed the leopard with a knife.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Natohnęʔ psanǫ mekośśa{{red|soha}}mąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ psanǫ-Ø mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;soha&amp;gt;}}-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG knife-ABS INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;leopard&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;My father killed a leopard with the knife (lit. My father leopard-killed with the knife).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Natohnęʔ mekośśa{{red|psanǫ}}mąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;psanǫ&amp;gt;}}-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;knife&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;My father killed it with a knife (lit. My father knife-killed it).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;*Natohnęʔ soha mekośśa{{red|psanǫ}}mąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ soha-Ø mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;psanǫ&amp;gt;}}-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG leopard-ABS INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;knife&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;(ungrammatical)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;*Natohnęʔ soha mekośśa{{red|psanǫ}}mąkta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ soha-Ø mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;psanǫ&amp;gt;}}-mą-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG leopard-ABS INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;knife&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;*My father killed a knife with the leopard. (nonsensical)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noun incorporation is not possible with verbs that are lexically intransitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Syntactic transformations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Topicalization ===&lt;br /&gt;
Almost any sentence constituent may be topicalized by being left-dislocated to the beginning of the clause. If the topicalized element is a 3rd person core argument of the verb (including applied objects), it is mandatorily co-referenced by an overt pronoun in the clause. Most commonly, proximate/obviative pronouns are used, although demonstratives are also seen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śceʔkoʔ sąʔ, ikmǫna cą yaśiʔnęmihma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ś=ceʔka-oʔ sąʔ, ik-mi~mina-Ø cą yaśi-ʔo-nęma-ihma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this=tribe-GEN in, 1PL.POSS-PL~mother-ABS EMPH marry-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.I-NEG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In this tribe, we do not marry our mothers.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Horoʔ etęʔpi, yaho tǫhnomąkwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hora-oʔ e-tęʔpi-Ø, yaho-Ø tǫhno-mą-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;chief-GEN 3SG.POSS-daughter-ABS, PROX.I.SG-ABS have_sex_with-REP-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The chief&#039;s daughter, that&#039;s who he apparently had sex with.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Argument postposing ===&lt;br /&gt;
Aside from topicalization, Tmaśareʔ permits another strategy for emphasis, which is right-dislocation of core arguments to the end of the clause. This construction is not particularly common, but increasingly being employed as a rhetorical device in storytelling and upper-register speech, and it is also used colloquially to convey enthusiasm or surprise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some important restrictions on the formation of postpositive constructions. Most significantly, if any of the core constituents of a transitive clause is moved (agent and patient in monotransitives, agent and theme in ditransitives), then the other core constituent will be postposed as well, or else omitted entirely. In fact, it is common to postpose only a single argument, and to drop all others. The recipient of a ditransitive verb will only appear as such in post-verbal position if there is also an overtly postposed or else incorporated theme; otherwise it will be converted into a benefactive applicative. Applied objects, on the other hand, may only be postposed if any other absolutive-marked participants are either non-overt or incorporated. Note also that the basic order of noun phrases remains the same as in ordinary head-final clauses (i.e. ergative, secondary absolutive, primary absolutive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Saląʔkną canę maciʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;salą-ʔo-kną canę maci-eʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;attack-DIR-3&amp;gt;1PL suddenly bear-ERG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Suddenly a bear attacked us.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Enańępemęńakwa śehomiʔ ǫkkekwela.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ena-&amp;lt;ńępe-mę&amp;gt;-ya-kwa śe=home-eʔ ǫk-ke~kwela-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;give-&amp;lt;sleep-VN&amp;gt;-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I this=song-ERG 1PL.POSS-PL~child-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;This song seems to have put our children to sleep.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Nǫćoʔ ǫcąʔ caśętaʔǫma kcektęʔpi!&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;nǫće-oʔ ǫcąʔ ca-śęta-ʔo-ɴma k-cek=tęʔpi-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;evening-GEN during BEN-speak_poetically-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.I 3PL.POSS-beautiful=daughter-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In the evening I really managed to have a flirt with their beautiful daughter!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Texts =&lt;br /&gt;
{{/Texts}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= See also =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[/Lexicon|Tmaśareʔ lexicon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Sahaśe]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Western languages]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16040</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16040"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:27:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe nouns consist of a stem plus prefixes and suffixes that are obligatory in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is inalienable possession. Body parts and kinship terms must take the prefix na- when belonging to the speaker, and i- otherwise. The prefixes are not used when speaking about body parts of kinship terms in general without reference to a specific object or person. For all other nouns, possession involves no special morphology. The possessor, in the oblique case, simply precedes the possessed thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 is case. The oblique is formed by changing the final vowel to o, or i if the final stem vowel is o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with verbs, noun stems in Sahaśe noun stems are complex. In addition to the root itself there are modifier prefixes, plural markers on animate nouns, and deverbal suffixes. Many forms have become lexicalized and not predictable, and so noun stems are listed in the lexicon, not roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 is modifier prefixes. This a closed class based on a much more productive derivational process in older Western languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 indicates plurality in animate nouns. Historically, this was accomplished by reduplication, but time has turned most plural stems into forms that must be memorized. As a result, plural forms are listed in the lexicon where they exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 is Deverbal suffixes. These suffixes delete the final root vowel, unless the root is one syllable or ends in a consonant. They attach to verbal roots, not stems.&lt;br /&gt;
-sa, -si, -so (the vowel matches the final root vowel): makes a noun that &lt;br /&gt;
-me: makes an action or event&lt;br /&gt;
-pa, -pi, -po (matching final root vowel): makes a noun that is the absolutive of the verb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[EXAMPLES]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16039</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16039"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:24:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Verbal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kikhokitska&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To clear land for farming&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;maklenyani&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;To wield something for digging&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16038</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16038"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:23:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Verbal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tsehtahepya&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They still yelled at me!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;sahasila&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;GLOSS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Because they said it...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
kikhokitska – to clear land for farming&lt;br /&gt;
maklenyani – to wield something for digging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16037</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16037"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:20:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Verbal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
tsehtahepya – “They still yelled at me!”&lt;br /&gt;
sahasila – “Because they said it...”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Root&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
kikhokitska – to clear land for farming&lt;br /&gt;
maklenyani – to wield something for digging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16036</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16036"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:18:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Verbal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S – 1 – 2 – 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
tsehtahepya – “They still yelled at me!”&lt;br /&gt;
sahasila – “Because they said it...”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S[1 – R – 2 – 3]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
kikhokitska – to clear land for farming&lt;br /&gt;
maklenyani – to wield something for digging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16035</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16035"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:17:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Verb&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S – 1 – 2 – 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
tsehtahepya – “They still yelled at me!”&lt;br /&gt;
sahasila – “Because they said it...”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S[1 – R – 2 – 3]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
kikhokitska – to clear land for farming&lt;br /&gt;
maklenyani – to wield something for digging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16034</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16034"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:16:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S – 1 – 2 – 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
tsehtahepya – “They still yelled at me!”&lt;br /&gt;
sahasila – “Because they said it...”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S[1 – R – 2 – 3]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
kikhokitska – to clear land for farming&lt;br /&gt;
maklenyani – to wield something for digging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16033</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16033"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:15:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Verbal Morphology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Verb&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Stem&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 2&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;Slot 3&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S – 1 – 2 – 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
tsehtahepya – “They still yelled at me!”&lt;br /&gt;
sahasila – “Because they said it...”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S[1 – R – 2 – 3]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
kikhokitska – to clear land for farming&lt;br /&gt;
maklenyani – to wield something for digging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16032</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16032"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:13:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verbal Morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśe verbs consist of a stem and up to three layers of suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S – 1 – 2 – 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 primarily gives information about the absolutive argument.&lt;br /&gt;
-he: 1st person absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
-hwa: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive I&lt;br /&gt;
-mo: 2nd or 3rd person absolutive II&lt;br /&gt;
The use of -mo is not always straight-forward. Its most common use is in reported speech. However, it can also be used as an irrealis marker, or to introduce important ideas within a narrative. When subsequent clauses have the same absolutive argument, especially when they are coordinated in some overt way, it may be possible to omit this layer of morphology, but this is subject to complex issues of tone and context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 marks a clause’s place in a larger utterance.&lt;br /&gt;
-la: protasis&lt;br /&gt;
-khi: apodosis&lt;br /&gt;
-po: contrast&lt;br /&gt;
The contrast suffix -po indicates that an idea is counter intuitive or contrasts with another clause, appearing in places where “however” or “even” might appear in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains only one optional suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
-ya: indicates that a clause is important or surprising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
tsehtahepya – “They still yelled at me!”&lt;br /&gt;
sahasila – “Because they said it...”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these are suffixes added to the stem, not the root. Layers of inherited Western grammatical affixes have become lexicalized, and are better treated as derivational morphology rather than grammatical. Here is a diagram of the verb stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S[1 – R – 2 – 3]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 1 historically produced applicatives that altered the role of the absolutive. However, these are not longer predictable from the original root.&lt;br /&gt;
s- (sa- before clusters or ś): usually the absolutive is some sort of beneficiary, target, or purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
mak- (k assimilates to following l, j, ń): usually the absolutive is a tool, means, or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 2 consists of denominal suffixes.&lt;br /&gt;
-yya, -yyi, -yyo (the vowel matches the last vowel of the root): stative, “to be”&lt;br /&gt;
-tska: active, “to make/do”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slot 3 contains various semantic extensions. Historically these would have had predictable meanings, but today the stems in which these suffixes appear are best treated as unique lexical units.&lt;br /&gt;
-ta: used with experience and handling verbs, sometimes with a reflexive meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
-ni: used with experience and handling verbs, often denoting the presence or manipulation of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
-ki (or -k before -ma): used with experience and handling verbs, especially when the absolutive is not well defined or not easily handled.&lt;br /&gt;
-ttso: used with motion and handling verbs to create logical consequences or intensives.&lt;br /&gt;
-nittso and -kittso are also found, but rarely, and only with handling verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples&lt;br /&gt;
kikhokitska – to clear land for farming&lt;br /&gt;
maklenyani – to wield something for digging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16031</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16031"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:11:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Phoneme inventory */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t · ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16030</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16030"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:10:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Phoneme inventory */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! dental&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t || ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || || n || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || || l || j || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16029</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16029"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:09:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Phoneme inventory */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! dental&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t || ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || || s || ʃ || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || || n || || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || || l || j || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16028</id>
		<title>Sahaśe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Saha%C5%9Be&amp;diff=16028"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:09:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: Created page with &amp;quot;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}} {{Article}} {{Language | color      = brown | language   = Sahaśe | phonetic   = [sa&amp;#039;haʃe] | date       = c. -600 YP | place      = Southern Peila...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Sahaśe&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [sa&#039;haʃe]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -600 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Southern Peilaš&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 25,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = Nopa Script&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Mouse-tache|Mouse-tache]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahaśo Sipa, or simply &#039;&#039;&#039;Sahaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a Western language of the Desert subgroup, possibly a direct descendant of TmaśareɁ. It is spoken on the high plateau south of the mountains that define the northern edge of southern Peilaš, mostly in the cool steppe above a thousand meters elevation. The Western colonization of the plateau may have begun as early as -1100, but the language described here is from the year -600 when the area is dominated by tens of thousands of Western speakers. Sahaśe is an ergative-absolutive language with strongly head-final syntax and moderately complex morphology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! dental&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t || ʦ || || k ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || || s || ʃ || || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || || n || || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || || l || j || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || || u&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Tma%C5%9Bare%CA%94&amp;diff=16027</id>
		<title>Tmaśareʔ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Tma%C5%9Bare%CA%94&amp;diff=16027"/>
		<updated>2021-11-06T02:02:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DEFAULTSORT:Tmashareq}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = brown&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Tmaśareʔ&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [ˈtmɑ.ʃɑ.ɾɛʔ]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = c. -1800 YP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Kipceʔ desert&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = c. 15,000&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western languages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = SOV&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   = highly synthetic; agglutinating w/ some fusion&lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Cedh|Cedh]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tmaśareʔ&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language of the [[Western languages|Western]] family, spoken on the northern fringe of the [[Kipceʔ desert]] on the west coast of [[Peilaš]]. It is the southernmost direct descendant of [[Proto-Western]], and it has been significantly influenced by an unknown substrate language. Apart from providing a number of loanwords, this substrate is assumed to be the source of linguistic features in Tmaśareʔ that are not found in other Western languages, for instance reduplicative plural formation and a productive alternation between approximants and nasals based on vowel nasality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ culture is still somewhat similar to the [[Proto-Western/Culture|culture of Proto-Western speakers]]; notably, the religion is still built around the concept of &#039;&#039;&#039;kwaco&#039;&#039;&#039; (&amp;quot;strength&amp;quot; associated with bodily fluids, especially blood and semen). Due to the scarcity of resources in the dry environment, most speakers of Tmaśareʔ are not fully sedentary. Usually they migrate up and down a river with the seasons, focusing on fishing at the coast in the dry summer, small-scale agriculture in the river valleys in the more humid winter, and goat- and sheep-herding as well as hunting all year round. Villages are often moved every few years so as not to exhaust the soil too soon. Bronze is known but obtainable only from trade with other Western or even [[Lukpanic languages|Lukpanic]] peoples further north, which doesn&#039;t happen too often (the Tmaśareʔ don&#039;t have much to offer in return). Writing is unknown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phonology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phoneme inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! labial&lt;br /&gt;
! dental&lt;br /&gt;
! alveolar&lt;br /&gt;
! palatal&lt;br /&gt;
! velar&lt;br /&gt;
! lab-vel&lt;br /&gt;
! glottal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plosive&lt;br /&gt;
| p || t || ʦ || ʧ || k || kʷ || ʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! fricative&lt;br /&gt;
| || || s || ʃ || || || h&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal&lt;br /&gt;
| m || || n || ɲ || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! liquid&lt;br /&gt;
| w || || l · ɾ || j || || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* /kʷ ʦ ʧ ʃ ɲ ɾ j/ are written &#039;&#039;&#039;kw c ć ś ń r y&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !! front !! central !! back&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! high&lt;br /&gt;
| i || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! mid&lt;br /&gt;
| e · ẽ || || o · õ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! low&lt;br /&gt;
| || a · ã ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Nasalized vowels are written with an ogonek: &#039;&#039;&#039;ę ą ǫ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Distribution and phonotactics ==&lt;br /&gt;
Syllable structure is &#039;&#039;&#039;(C)(C)CV(C)&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The onset may consist of any single consonant, of a plosive followed by a nasal, or of two non-identical obstruents other than /h/. Word-initially, three-term onset clusters consisting of two plosives separated by a sibilant are also permissible. Clusters ending in one of /t ʦ ʧ/ may additionally be followed by /w/, and clusters ending in one of /p t k/ may additionally be followed by /j/. Empty onsets only occur word-initially. As the glottal stop is not found in that position, onsetless syllables are sometimes analysed as containing underlying /ʔ/. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All single consonants except /w j/ can appear in a medial syllable coda; however, coda consonants other than /ʔ h/ are fairly rare. (Note that pure obstruent clusters are usually syllabified as complex onsets.) Nasal coda consonants can only occur in geminates, and coda /ɾ/ can only occur before nasals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of a word, /ʔ/ is the only allowed coda consonant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following additional restrictions apply:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; does not occur immediately after &#039;&#039;&#039;y&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The liquid consonants &#039;&#039;&#039;w l r y&#039;&#039;&#039; do not occur after nasalized vowels.&lt;br /&gt;
* The distinction between /k/ and /kʷ/ is contrastive only in prevocalic position. /kʷ/ never contrasts with the cluster /kw/, but it is analysed as a separate phoneme because of its high frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Phonetic detail ==&lt;br /&gt;
* In the prestige dialect, obstruents are almost never voiced. Some speakers have voiced allophones of non-glottal obstruents adjacent to nasals and nasalized vowels though, and sometimes after &#039;&#039;&#039;l&#039;&#039;&#039; as well. In dialects that have it, obstruent voicing is blocked by adjacent voiceless consonants.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plosives are aspirated when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;h&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;m n ń l r&#039;&#039;&#039; are devoiced in the same position. In the prestige variety, devoiced nasals are realized as a nasalized vowel followed by a voiceless fricative: /Vhm Vhn Vhɲ/ → [Ṽɸ Ṽθ Ṽç].&lt;br /&gt;
* Before obstruents, coda &#039;&#039;&#039;h&#039;&#039;&#039; is normally realized as velar [x], though it may become [ç] when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or followed by &#039;&#039;&#039;ć y&#039;&#039;&#039;, and [ɸ] when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;o ǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or followed by &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ć ś&#039;&#039;&#039; become alveolo-palatal [ʨ ɕ] when adjacent to &#039;&#039;&#039;i ń l&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;l&#039;&#039;&#039; is commonly palatalized to [ʎ] when adjacent to &#039;&#039;&#039;i ć ś ń&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* In other positions, coda &#039;&#039;&#039;l&#039;&#039;&#039; is darkened to [ɫ] or even [ɰ].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;w&#039;&#039;&#039; is normally realized as a purely labial approximant [β̞], which is devoiced to [ɸ] when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;h&#039;&#039;&#039;. Intervocalic &#039;&#039;&#039;w&#039;&#039;&#039; may also be realized as [w], especially when preceded by &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* When preceding a nasalized vowel, postconsonantal &#039;&#039;&#039;w r l j&#039;&#039;&#039; are realized as [m n n ɲ] (written &#039;&#039;&#039;m n n ń&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039; is realized as [e] word-finally, and as [ɛ] elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;a&#039;&#039;&#039; is [ʌ] in unstressed open syllables, and [ɑ] elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039; is [ʊ] in unstressed open syllables, [o] in stressed open syllables, and [ɔ] in closed syllables.&lt;br /&gt;
* Nasalized &#039;&#039;&#039;ę ą ǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; are [{{IPA|ɛ̃ ɑ̃ ɔ̃}}] in all positions. &lt;br /&gt;
* In stressed open syllables, nasalized vowels (but not oral ones) are lengthened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stress ==&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has a dynamic stress accent. Most words are accented on the first syllable of the root; however, pluralized nouns normally stress the reduplicated syllable (i.e. the first vowel of the word), and most conjunctions, particles, and postpositions are unaccented. Some but not all of those grammatical morphemes cliticize to other sentence constituents, becoming part of the host&#039;s prosodic group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longer words containing at least three post-tonic syllables exhibit one or more positional secondary accents. These are placed on every even syllable counting from the end of the word; however, syllables immediately adjacent to the main stress do not receive secondary stress. If a word ends in a glottal stop, the last secondary accent moves from the penult to the final syllable, triggering exceptional secondary stress on the antepenultimate if the fifth-to-last vowel carries a lexical accent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As exceptions to the above, compounds (which includes nouns with an adjectival prefix) normally stress the first syllable of the first root, with the second root receiving secondary stress if its accented syllable does not end up adjacent to the main stress. Further secondary stress is assigned by counting from the end of the word as usual. Verbs with an incorporated object do not fall under this rule; the object - even though it follows the verb root - receives positional stress only, which can lead to a changed prosodic pattern as compared to the full nominal form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sound changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{collapsible||&lt;br /&gt;
The following set of sound changes from Proto-Western to Tmaśareʔ has been reconstructed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Unstressed medial NV syllables were lost before a non-nasal consonant with compensatory nasalization of preceding oral vowels. The remaining consonant acquired palatalization or labialization if the lost vowel had been [i] or [u] respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
# The lateral fricative [ɬ] assimilated to neighbouring sibilants, merged into [l] after consonants and nasalized vowels, and lenited to [h] otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
# [b d ʣ ʤ ɣ ɣʷ] became [m n n ɲ ŋ ŋʷ] adjacent to a nasalized vowel. When preceded by a nasalized vowel, [l j w] also became [n ɲ ŋʷ], but not when followed by one. Nasal vowels preceded by an obstruent that was affected by this change merged into their oral counterparts.&lt;br /&gt;
# Lenition:&lt;br /&gt;
#* [l] disappeared after consonants, leaving palatalization (probably via [ʎ]).&lt;br /&gt;
#* Initial and intervocalic [b d ʣ ʤ] lenited to [β ɾ z ʒ]. In all other positions they merged into the voiceless unaspirated plosive series, i.e. [p t ʦ ʧ].&lt;br /&gt;
#* [ɣ] merged with [j] in initial position and when palatalized, and [ɣʷ] merged with [w] except when followed by [u]. All remaining [ɣ] and [ɣʷ] were deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
# Vowel synaeresis: &lt;br /&gt;
#* Coda [j w] vocalized to [i u].&lt;br /&gt;
#* Sequences of two identical vowels created by the above changes were shortened with compensatory gemination of following single consonants.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Any prevocalic [i u] became [j w] respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
#* When not followed by a vowel, [eu au ou] all became [ow], and [ei ai oi] all became [ej].&lt;br /&gt;
#* [u ũ ĩ] became [o õ ẽ] in all positions.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Somewhat sporadically, [i] became [e] when preceded by one of [ʧʰ ʧ ʃ ʒ kʰ k j]. This change appears to have been general after [j], but limited to unstressed environments (mostly in word-final position) after the other consonants listed. Postalveolar consonants followed by a vowel undergoing this change were usually depalatalized to alveolars [ʦʰ ʦ s z].&lt;br /&gt;
#* [ej] raised to [i], causing palatalization on subsequent consonants. Somewhat in parallel, [ow] reduced to [o] with labialization on following plosives.&lt;br /&gt;
# [tʲ ʦʲ kʲ mʲ nʲ ŋʲ lʲ ɾʲ] became [ʦ ʧ ʧ ɲ ɲ ɲ ʎ ʎ]. Palatalization was then lost from all consonants except [ʔ].&lt;br /&gt;
# All labialized nasals merged with [m], except when followed by [o], in which case the rounded vowel absorbed the labial coarticulation. Also, [ʦʷ ʦʷʰ] were simplified to [tʷ tʷʰ].&lt;br /&gt;
# [pʷ pʷʰ pʰ] all lenited to [ɸ]. This change was blocked by any preceding consonant.&lt;br /&gt;
# Aspiration on plosives was lost if an adjacent syllable contained [h]. Remaining aspiration was transferred from the syllable onset to the coda of the same syllable, being lost only when it ended up preceding one of [ʔ h] (generally) or [ɾ l ʎ] (within the same morpheme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Medial vowels in open syllables were deleted under somewhat uncertain conditions. It is usually assumed that all vowels carrying primary or secondary stress were retained; however, if this holds true the location of the accent must have been different from both the earlier Proto-Western and the later Tmaśareʔ systems. Also, the earliest vowel deletions must have begun before the lenition of labialized/aspirated [p] (change #8), while the last ones clearly postdate the lenition of [β z ʒ] (change #13). Closer examination of the phonological patterns reveals that pure obstruent clusters were far more likely to be formed than most other types, and that syncope operated most strongly in pre-stress position. Curiously, clusters of a liquid or semivowel followed by an obstruent, a very frequent type crosslinguistically, were apparently not formed - almost all examples of such are either loanwords or retentions from PW.&lt;br /&gt;
# Many clusters were simplified. The most prominent processes include devoicing of all clustered obstruents, total assimilation of pure fricative clusters, reduction of affricates to a simple sibilant when followed by another affricate, fortification of sibilants to affricates when preceded by a liquid or nasal, and condensation of [w β ɸ] into labialization of preceding [t ʦ ʧ k ʔ]. Labialized plosives followed by a sibilant simplified to [p]; before plosives, labialization was normally transferred to the last obstruent in the cluster instead.&lt;br /&gt;
# [wa wã] became [o õ] in all positions, and [we wẽ] did the same before labialized consonants (including [ɸ] {{--}} /hʷ/). In addition to this, [ẽ ã] followed by one of [ʔʷ m] were rounded to [õ], and [ã õ] followed by one of [ʔʲ ɲ] were fronted to [ẽ]. Occasionally, oral vowels in the same positions were affected in a similar manner.&lt;br /&gt;
# [β z ʒ] were devoiced to [ɸ s ʃ] word-initially. In all other positions they lenited to [w ɾ ʎ] instead.&lt;br /&gt;
# Word-final oral vowels were lost after [ʔ], along with any coarticulation on the glottal stop. Remaining medial [ʔʷ ʔʲ] uncoupled to [ʔw ʔj].&lt;br /&gt;
# Word-final [p t ʦ ʧ k] all reduced to [ʔ], and word-final [h] was lost outright.&lt;br /&gt;
# Any nasal followed by a different consonant or a word boundary was lost with nasalization of a preceding oral vowel. {{!}}i~{{!}} became [ẽ].&lt;br /&gt;
# [w ɾ l ʎ j] became [m n n ɲ ɲ] between a consonant and a nasalized vowel in either order, or when sandwiched between two nasalized vowels, but not between one nasalized and one oral vowel in either order. Offglides of labialized obstruents were affected as well, resulting in Cm clusters. (This change strongly resembles #3, and in fact it may have been active all along).&lt;br /&gt;
# Epenthetic [h] was inserted between any sequences of two adjacent vowels, except where one of these vowels bordered a consonant group that included [h] already. In such cases, the epenthetic consonant was [ʔ].&lt;br /&gt;
# [ɸ] merged with [h], [ʎ] merged with [l], and [ŋ] merged with [ɲ].&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Morphology =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nominal morphology ==&lt;br /&gt;
The three cases of Proto-Western (absolutive, ergative, construct) are retained in Tmaśareʔ, with the construct being reanalysed as a genitive. On the other hand, the edibility distinction has been lost, and even though the plural is retained as an inflectional category, the inherited number morphology has become unproductive and survives only in pronouns and a few fossilized lexical items. Noun plurals are now formed by a reduplicative strategy, picked up from a substrate language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The citation form of Tmaśareʔ nouns is the absolutive singular.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Case ===&lt;br /&gt;
The ergative and genitive cases are formed by ablaut of the final vowel of the noun stem, combined with a suffixed glottal stop:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! absolutive !! ergative !! genitive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! e/i-stem&lt;br /&gt;
| -e, -i || -iʔ || rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -oʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! a/o-stem&lt;br /&gt;
| -a, -o || -eʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! nasal stem&lt;br /&gt;
| -ę, -ą, -ǫ || -ęʔ || -ǫʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some nouns end in a glottal stop in the absolutive case. These words take the regular affixes &#039;&#039;&#039;-eʔ&#039;&#039;&#039; in the ergative and &#039;&#039;&#039;-oʔ&#039;&#039;&#039; in the genitive, but often undergo stem changes with the addition of a case suffix. Most frequently, the stem-final glottal stop reverts to its original value (which may be any other plosive consonant); sometimes a vowel is dropped as well. Irregular oblique stems are indicated in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;hąse&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;horse&#039; ({{sc|abs}}) → {{sc|erg}} &#039;&#039;&#039;hąs{{red|iʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;, {{sc|gen}} &#039;&#039;&#039;hąs{{red|oʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;kwela&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;child&#039; ({{sc|abs}}) → {{sc|erg}} &#039;&#039;&#039;kwel{{red|eʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;, {{sc|gen}} &#039;&#039;&#039;kwel{{red|oʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;tohną&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;headman of a family&#039; ({{sc|abs}}) → {{sc|erg}} &#039;&#039;&#039;tohn{{red|ęʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;, {{sc|gen}} &#039;&#039;&#039;tohn{{red|ǫʔ}}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Number ===&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike those of Proto-Western, Tmaśareʔ nominals do not inflect for dual number. The inherited suffixal plural morphology was originally replaced by reduplication of the first C(C)V portion of the stem; however, this pattern has become obscured by a combination of stress shift and vowel syncope. Synchronically, plurals usually look like an infixed copy of the initial consonant(s), with echo vowels as needed to conform to phonotactic rules. Words with initial nasals regularly form their plural with nasalization of the first vowel (often accompanied by a change in quality); vowel-initial words tend to use either /-hV-/ or /-ʔ-/ as the plural infix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quite a number of words have slightly irregular plural forms. In addition, there is a distinct class of &#039;&#039;mass nouns&#039;&#039; that do not form plurals; these mostly belong to one of the noun classes IV, V, and VI. Plurals are given in the lexicon for all nouns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;takala&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;rope&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;ta{{red|t}}kala&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;ropes&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;kohta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;boat&#039; →  &#039;&#039;&#039;ko{{red|ko}}hta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;boats&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;mera&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;dog&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;m{{red|ǫ}}ra&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;dogs&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;aśę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;woman&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;a{{red|ʔ}}śę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;women&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Possession ===&lt;br /&gt;
Like its predecessor, Tmaśareʔ distinguishes between alienable and inalienable forms of possession. Alienably possessed nouns are simply accompanied by their possessor, cast in the genitive, whereas inalienably possessed nouns take an obligatory possessive prefix marking number and person of the possessor. Note that the possessor need not necessarily be present as an overt noun phrase. For first and second person possessors, the possessive prefixes still have a separate set of forms deriving from the PW dual. However, these are now used for any small group of inextricably linked possessors, e.g. for a group of brothers (even if there are three or four of them), and are probably best interpreted as paucal or collective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! singular !! &amp;amp;nbsp; paucal &amp;amp;nbsp; !! &amp;amp;nbsp; plural &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 1st&lt;br /&gt;
| na- || ę- || ǫk-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 2nd&lt;br /&gt;
| ć- || c- || ik-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 3rd&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | e- || k-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When followed by a consonant cluster or a glottal consonant, the plural forms appear in the alternative allomorphs &#039;&#039;&#039;ǫka-, iko-&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;kwe-&#039;&#039;&#039;. Before oral vowels they appear as &#039;&#039;&#039;ǫkw-, ikw-&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;kw-&#039;&#039;&#039;, and before nasal vowels they appear as &#039;&#039;&#039;ǫkm-, ikm-&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;km-&#039;&#039;&#039; respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
* The 2sg and 2pc prefixes become &#039;&#039;&#039;će- ce-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a consonant cluster or a glottal consonant, and &#039;&#039;&#039;ś- s-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by an affricate.&lt;br /&gt;
* The 1sg and 3sg/pc prefixes add an epenthetic /ʔ/ before vowels, while the 1pc prefix adds /n/.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|naʔ}}ilca&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;my hand&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ć}}tohną&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;your({{sc|sg}}) father&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|km}}ǫʔta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;their teeth&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The alienable/inalienable distinction also serves as a productive method to change the meaning of nouns:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;man&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|e}}la&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;her husband&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|na}}nańo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;my foot&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|k}}nęńo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;their feet&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;nańo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;platform, base&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same prefixes also appear on verbal nouns in subordinate clauses, specifying the subject (i.e. the syntactic pivot) of the nominalized verb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;mihe-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;to be absent&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ik}}mihmę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;your({{sc|pl}}) absence&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;lǫpa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;to kiss&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ę}}nǫpamę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;our({{sc|pc}}) kiss; the event of the two of us kissing each other&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Noun classes ===&lt;br /&gt;
The pronominal classifiers of Proto-Western, which could be assigned pragmatically depending on the edibility and/or semantic role of the referent, have become fixed in reference in Tmaśareʔ, thus creating a system of lexical noun classes. These classes are not marked on the nouns themselves in any way; however, pronouns, determiners, and 3rd person absolutive participant marking on verbs exhibit noun class concord. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of the nine classifiers reconstructed for Proto-Western, two pairs have merged: those for edible and inedible solid objects (&#039;&#039;*-ca-&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;*-ta-&#039;&#039;), and those for edible and inedible mushy objects (&#039;&#039;*-če-&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;*-kʰiw-&#039;&#039;). The latter group (Tmaśareʔ noun class V) is increasingly becoming confused with classes IV and VI (granular masses and liquids, respectively); these three classes are rarest and tend to include mostly mass nouns with no distinct plural forms and often fairly similar semantics. Among those speakers that conflate them, usually classifier IV is the one that prevails morphologically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The resulting classifier system is shown in the table below. Note that all classifiers have several allomorphs depending on the phonological environment. For convenience, the most frequent surface forms of all classifiers will be listed separately in the relevant chapters of this grammar sketch ([[#Proximate and obviative pronouns|3rd and 4th person pronouns]], [[#Other pronominals|correlative pronouns]], and [[#Participant marking|verbal agreement]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; C_ &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! V_{ʔ,h,CC}&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; V_C &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; V~_C &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; V~_# &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; V_# &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| -wa-/-o- || -ho- || -h- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ma- || -ho&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;humans, gods, spirits etc.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ta- || -s- || -t- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ta&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;animals, solid spherical or irregularly shaped objects&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| -ǫ- || -ńǫ- || {{sc|nas}} || colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; | -ńǫ-&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;tools, weapons, solid long objects&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| -ki- || -hki- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -hk- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -hke&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;granular masses&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -će- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ć- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -će&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;soft objects; mushy matter&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| {{sc|pal}}-e- || -ye- || {{sc|del}}-i-{{sc|pal}} || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -ńe- || -ye&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;liquids, fire, wind etc.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -śi- || -ś- || -h- || colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | -se&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 l&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;intangible or abstract nominals, geographical features, trees&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|nas}} indicates that the classifier is realized as nasalization on the preceding vowel.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|pal}} indicates that preceding or following prevocalic /t ʦ k s n/ palatalize to /ʦ ʧ ʧ ʃ ɲ/.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that the preceding vowel is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* The postconsonantal class I classifier is &#039;&#039;&#039;-wa-&#039;&#039;&#039; after /t ʦ ʧ k ʔ/, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-o-&#039;&#039;&#039; after other consonants.&lt;br /&gt;
* Classifiers V and VII merge phonetically when immediately followed by an affricate; the resulting forms are those given for class VII.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Personal pronouns ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has true personal pronouns only for speech act participants. They inflect for case in exactly the same way as regular nouns. However, they do not form their plural via reduplication, using distinct plural stems instead. In the first person, the plural is suppletive; in the second person, it contains a reflex of the original plural marker &#039;&#039;*-kʷ&#039;&#039;, analogically extended to &#039;&#039;&#039;-kwe-&#039;&#039;&#039; with the phonetic reduction of PW case suffixes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1st person&#039;&#039;&#039; (speaker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! absolutive !! ergative !! genitive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
| na || neʔ || noʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plural&lt;br /&gt;
| sa || seʔ || soʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2nd person&#039;&#039;&#039; (listener)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
! !! absolutive !! ergative !! genitive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
| ta || teʔ || toʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! plural&lt;br /&gt;
| tkwe || tkwiʔ || tkwoʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proximate and obviative pronouns ===&lt;br /&gt;
The anaphoric and cataphoric pronoun stems of Proto-Western, &#039;&#039;*ya-&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;*kʷi-&#039;&#039;, have been reanalysed as proximate and obviative (3rd and 4th person) respectively. Unlike 1st and 2nd person pronouns, these inflect not only for case and number, but also for noun class. Case inflection is regular. Number inflection uses the analogically extended &#039;&#039;*-kʷ&#039;&#039; morpheme instead of reduplication, like the 2nd person pronouns. However, sound changes have fused the original phoric stems with the classifiers in many forms, to a point where it is easier to treat Tmaśareʔ proximate and obviative pronouns as having distinct stems for each combination of class, person, and number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3rd person&#039;&#039;&#039; (proximate)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; plural &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| yaho- || yoʔ, yokwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| yata- || cakwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| yańǫ- || ńǫkwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| yahke- || śkikwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| yaće- || ćekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| yaye- || yekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| yaśe- || śikwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;yokwe&#039;&#039;&#039; is the regular stem of the class I 3pl pronoun, and also used as a more formal absolutive. In colloquial speech, the absolutive is reduced to &#039;&#039;&#039;yoʔ&#039;&#039;&#039;; the other cases remain regular.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4th person&#039;&#039;&#039; (obviative)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! singular&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp; plural &amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| kwa- || kwakwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| kwita- || psakwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| kwińǫ- || kmǫkwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| kwihke- || kwihkwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| kwiće- || pśekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| kwoye- || kwoyekwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| kwiśe- || pśikwe-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other pronominals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstratives, indefinite quantifiers, and interrogative pronouns were originally built on the same template as the 3rd and 4th person pronouns - a deictic stem, followed by a classifier, followed by case/number inflection. During the development of Tmaśareʔ, the deictic elements were increasingly perceived as proclitic morphemes, which eventually came to be used with all nominals. In some colloquial registers they can even be added to other pronouns for locational or referential emphasis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! deictic !! gloss&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| śe=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | this&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ra=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | that&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ya=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | the aforementioned one(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| yel=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | the other one(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| twi=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | some, a few&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ląc=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | many&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ha=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | all, every&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ye=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | no, none&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| wi=&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2 italic&amp;quot; | which, what&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;śe=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;ś=&#039;&#039;&#039; before vowels and single stem-initial plosives, and to &#039;&#039;&#039;ć=&#039;&#039;&#039; before stem-initial nasals.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ra=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;r=&#039;&#039;&#039; before vowels, and to &#039;&#039;&#039;t=&#039;&#039;&#039; before /p k kʷ m n ɲ w/.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;twi=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;tw=&#039;&#039;&#039; before oral vowels, to &#039;&#039;&#039;tm=&#039;&#039;&#039; before nasalized vowels, and usually (but not always) to &#039;&#039;&#039;toʔ=&#039;&#039;&#039; before nasals.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ye=&#039;&#039;&#039; shortens to &#039;&#039;&#039;i=&#039;&#039;&#039; before stem-initial consonant clusters.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shortening before consonants does not happen if this would cause the resulting word to become monosyllabic.&lt;br /&gt;
* When attached to nouns, all deictic proclitics may co-occur with plural marking; however, the quantifying &#039;&#039;&#039;twi=&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;ląc=&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;ha=&#039;&#039;&#039; are more commonly used with singular nouns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ś}}kahpa&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;this tree&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ra}}cacnanǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;those spears&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|toʔ}}nęke&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;a few steps&#039; (note the singular stem; cf. {{sc|pl}} &#039;&#039;&#039;nenęke&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|tm}}ęta&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;some feathers&#039; (cf. {{sc|pl}} &#039;&#039;&#039;ęʔta&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|wi}}psanǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;which knife?&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combined with the classifiers, the deictic clitics can be arranged into a large but mostly regular table of correlative pro-forms, which is given below. Note that the demonstratives have separate plural forms. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; class&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; this &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; that &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; some &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; many &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; every &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; no &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
! question&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! I &lt;br /&gt;
| śeho-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śokwe- || raho-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;rokwe- || twiho- || lątwa- || haho- || yeho- || wiho-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! II&lt;br /&gt;
| śeta-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śtakwe- || rata-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;ratkwe- || twita- || lącta- || hata- || yeta- || wita-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! III&lt;br /&gt;
| śeńǫ-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śękwe- || rańǫ-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;rękwe- || twińǫ- || lącńǫ- || hańǫ- || yeńǫ- || wińǫ-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! IV&lt;br /&gt;
| śehke-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śkikwe- || rahke-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;tkihkwe- || twihke- || lącke- || hahke- || yehke- || wihke-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! V&lt;br /&gt;
| śeće-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śećkwe- || raće-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;raćkwe- || twiće- || ląsće- || haće- || yeće- || wiće-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VI&lt;br /&gt;
| śeye-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śikwe- || raye-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;rikwe- || twiye- || ląće- || haye- || yeye- || wiye-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! VII&lt;br /&gt;
| śeśi-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;śeśkwe- || raśi-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;raśkwe- || twiśi- || ląći- || haśi- || yeśi- || wiśi-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Numerals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ retains the base-8 number system of Proto-Western. Numeric quantifiers come in three forms: (1) Indeclinable numeral particles, which consist of the bare stem and are used for counting and compounding; (2) cardinal numerals, which function like pronouns and inflect for case and noun class (note that the latter is agreement, and thus mandatory even when used attributively); and (3) ordinal numerals, formed with the suffix &#039;&#039;&#039;-ro&#039;&#039;&#039;, which may only be used as modifiers of a nominal head in this bare form and are thus syntactically comparable to a noun in the genitive case, but which may be extended to full pronominals by suffixing an appropriate classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The paradigm for numerals is entirely regular, with classifiers suffixed to the numeral stem. However, note that the class VII classifier appears in the form &#039;&#039;-se&#039;&#039; (unlike with other pronouns), and that all numeral stems lose their final vowel in compounds with a vowel-initial noun stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; !! stem !! ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 1 &lt;br /&gt;
| takwa- || takwaro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| śi- || śiro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nahto- || nahtoro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| męca- || męcaro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| ora- || oraro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| męći- || męćiro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| nalći- || nalćiro&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| ńaho- || ńahoro&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiples of eight are formed with an ordinal followed by the cardinal. Note also that nouns accompanied by a numeral always appear in their singular form:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;nahtoro ńahońǫ yeći&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;nahto-ro ńaho-ńǫ yeći&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;three-ORD eight-CL.III arrow&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;twenty-four arrows (lit. &amp;quot;third eight&amp;quot;)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other numerals are formed as a coordinated phrase, with the enclitic &#039;&#039;&#039;=ʔma&#039;&#039;&#039; suffixed to the unit number: &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ńaho śitaʔma mera&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ńaho śi-ta=ʔma mera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;eight two-CL.II=and dog&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;ten dogs (lit. &amp;quot;eight and two&amp;quot;)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distributive numerals are formed with reduplication, like the plural forms of nouns.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;memęcahke oha&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;me~męca-hke oha&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;DISTR~four-CL.IV bean&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;four beans each&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Verbal Complex ==&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has extended the verbal system of Proto-Western significantly through the agglutination (and, to some extent, fusion) of adpositions and particles to the verb, resulting in a polysynthetic verbal complex that is best described in terms of a positional template containing twelve slots. By far the most part of verbal morphology is suffixing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c padded}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| I || II || III || IV || V || VI || VII || VIII || IX || X || XI || XII&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(applicative)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;stem&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(incorporated noun)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(directional)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(causative)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(modal)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(evidential)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(ergative)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;absolutive&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(aspect)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(negation)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;(speech act)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the verb stem (which may itself be polymorphemic - e.g. formed by compounding or by adding a derivational affix) and the absolutive agreement suffix are mandatory with all verbs. Ergative agreement is mandatory with transitive verbs; all other affixes are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Applicatives ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are four applicative prefixes that can be used to promote an oblique argument to the rank of primary absolutive, triggering agreement with this argument. Depending on lexical properties of the verb, the original absolutive participant may be left out, become incorporated, or stay in place as long as the verb remains maximally ditransitive. If the original absolutive is omitted, the applicativized argument itself may undergo incorporation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The applicative prefixes are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* benefactive ({{sc|ben}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;c-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;ca-&#039;&#039;&#039; before stem-initial consonant clusters or /s ʃ h l j/; &#039;&#039;&#039;s-&#039;&#039;&#039; before /ʦ ʧ/; causes following /r/ to mutate to /t/)&lt;br /&gt;
* instrumental ({{sc|instr}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;mek-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;meʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; before /k kʷ l r j ɲ/; causes following /h/ to mutate to /w/ or /l/ depending on etymology)&lt;br /&gt;
* locative ({{sc|loc}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;twe-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;tm-&#039;&#039;&#039; before nasal vowels; &#039;&#039;&#039;tw-&#039;&#039;&#039; before oral vowels) &lt;br /&gt;
* lative ({{sc|lat}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;k-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;ke-&#039;&#039;&#039; before /l/ and most consonant clusters; causes following /r/ to mutate to /t/; causes following /h/ to mutate to /w/ or /l/ depending on etymology)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;kwekwo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;cook&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|c}}kwekwo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;cook for so.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;woʔla-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;plan, come up with&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|c}}woʔla-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;suggest sth. to so.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;yahke-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;keep&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|ca}}yahke-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;take care of sth. on behalf of so.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;romę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;lend, borrow&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|c}}tomę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;lend for the purpose of&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;olca-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hit&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|mek}}olca-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hit with sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;homę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;help&#039;  → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|meʔ}}lomę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;help by doing/using sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;ćeka-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;sit&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|twe}}ćeka-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;sit (at a place)&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;somo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;agree&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|twe}}somo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;approve of sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;yele-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;run&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|k}}yele-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;run towards sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;cana-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;glow&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;{{red|k}}cana-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;illuminate sth.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directionals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Two directional suffixes have become grammaticalized as inflectional markers specifying the direction of movement with regard to the &amp;quot;focus point&amp;quot;, which is determined by context - usually one of speaker, addressee, or sentence topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* motion towards focus ({{sc|all}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-hca-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* motion away from focus ({{sc|abl}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔco-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;ye-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;go&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;ye{{red|hca}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;come, arrive&#039;; &#039;&#039;&#039;ye{{red|ʔco}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;leave&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:* &#039;&#039;&#039;okmę-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;carry&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;okmę{{red|hca}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;bring&#039;; &#039;&#039;&#039;okmę{{red|ʔco}}-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;carry away&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Causative ===&lt;br /&gt;
A morphological causative can be formed with a suffix that shows up as &#039;&#039;&#039;-na-&#039;&#039;&#039; when preceded by a nasalized vowel, as &#039;&#039;&#039;-s-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a plosive or sibilant, as &#039;&#039;&#039;-r-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a nasal consonant, and as &#039;&#039;&#039;-ra-&#039;&#039;&#039; otherwise. [[#Causativization|Causativization]] adds an agent to the verb, demoting any pre-existing agent from ergative to absolutive (monotransitives only) or oblique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* causative ({{sc|caus}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-na-/-s-/-r-/-ra-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modals ===&lt;br /&gt;
The next slot in the verbal template indicates modality. There are three morphemes that can appear here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* optative ({{sc|opt}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ći-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* obligative ({{sc|obl}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-tę-/-tańa-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* abilitative ({{sc|abil}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-yąʔ-/-yąpa-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These suffixes are a fairly recent innovation, originating in compound verbs with &#039;&#039;&#039;ćiye-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;want&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;tańa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;must, should&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;yąpa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;be capable of&#039; as their second element. (The directionals and the causative were still partly derivational at that time, which explains the position of the modal affixes right in the middle of the verbal complex.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mono- and disyllabic variants of the obligative and abilitative suffixes are selected mainly on a prosodic basis: The modal suffix always receives secondary stress, and thus prefers to be in an even-numbered syllable counting from the end of the verb. However, only the disyllabic forms are seen before the direct participation evidential, and only the monosyllabic forms are seen before the assumed and hearsay evidentials. The abilitative is also always monosyllabic before the non-visual sensory evidential.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that modal suffixes may not occur in verbs with an [[#Noun incorporation|incorporated noun]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Evidentials ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ has a set of six verbal suffixes indicating the nature of the evidence supporting a statement. These morphemes are not obligatory; however, the lack of an evidential in a main clause not marked as interrogative or irrealis is usually taken as a sign of pure speculation and thus likely to raise suspicions about the statement&#039;s truth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* direct participation or general knowledge ({{sc|dir}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔo-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; before prevocalic plosives, nasals and glides, and sometimes also before consonant clusters depending on the prosodic structure of the word)&lt;br /&gt;
* visual sensory ({{sc|vis}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ya-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* non-visual sensory ({{sc|sens}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-pǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039; (causing nasalization of following approximants)&lt;br /&gt;
* inferred from physical or situational evidence ({{sc|evid}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-loʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;loʔk-&#039;&#039;&#039; when followed by a nasal or sibilant)&lt;br /&gt;
* assumed ({{sc|ass}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-kwe-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;-p-&#039;&#039;&#039; when preceded by a vowel and followed by a prevocalic plosive)&lt;br /&gt;
* hearsay ({{sc|rep}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-mą-&#039;&#039;&#039; (causing nasalization of following approximants)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Participant marking ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ verbs exhibit polypersonal agreement with their primary absolutive arguments as well as with the ergative arguments of transitive verbs. Ditransitive verbs normally agree with the theme, not the recipient. However, verbs with an applicative prefix inflect for the applicativized absolutive element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Participant marking can be broken down in two distinct sets of affixes, with the ergative marker (if present) preceding the absolutive marker. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The underlying ergative agreement suffixes are &#039;&#039;&#039;-ɴ-&#039;&#039;&#039; (i.e. nasalization of the preceding vowel) for 1st singular, &#039;&#039;&#039;-nę-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 1st plural, &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćeh-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 2nd singular, &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćęh-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 2nd plural, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-k-&#039;&#039;&#039; (no number distinction) for 3rd/4th person agents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The underlying absolutive markers are &#039;&#039;&#039;-na-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 1st person, &#039;&#039;&#039;-tah-&#039;&#039;&#039; for 2nd person (both with a nasalized vowel for plural referents), and the regular set of classifiers for 3rd/4th person participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of sound changes, specific combinations of these agreement markers have become quite fusional; the full set of pronominal suffixes is therefore given in the table below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | ergative →&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | none&amp;amp;nbsp;(intr.)&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;13&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | 3p/4p&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | absolutive ↓&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
| {{sc|nas}}-/-ne-/-ę- || -nna- || -nę- || -ćehna- || -ćęhna- || -kna-/-ką&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|1pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
| -ną- || -nną- || -nęną- || -ćehną- || -ćęhną- || -kną-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2sg}}&lt;br /&gt;
| -ta(h)- || {{sc|nas}}-ta(h)- || -nęta(h)- || -ćta(h)- || -ćęhta- || -kta(h)-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | {{sc|2pl}}&lt;br /&gt;
| -tą(h)- || {{sc|nas}}-tą(h)- || -nętą(h)- || -ćtą(h)- || -ćęhtą- || -ktą(h)-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;7&amp;quot; | 3p/4p&lt;br /&gt;
! class=&amp;quot;r&amp;quot; | class I&lt;br /&gt;
| -ho-/-ma-/-wa- || {{sc|del}}-ǫma-/-neho || -nęma- || -ćeho- || -ćęhma- || -kwa-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class II&lt;br /&gt;
| -ta- || {{sc|nas}}-ta- || -nęta- || -ćehta- || -ćęhta- || -kta-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class III&lt;br /&gt;
| -ńǫ- || -ńńǫ- || -nęńǫ- || -ćehńǫ- || -ćęhńǫ- || -kńǫ-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class IV&lt;br /&gt;
| -hke-/-ki-/-ki- || {{sc|nas}}-ki- || -nęki- || -ćehke- || -ćęhke- || -kahke-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class V&lt;br /&gt;
| -će- || {{sc|nas}}-će- || -nęće- || -ćehće- || -ćęhće- || -kće-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class VI&lt;br /&gt;
| -ye-/-ńe-/-ye- || {{sc|del}}-ęńe- || -nęńe- || -ćehye- || -ćęhńe- || -kye-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! class VII&lt;br /&gt;
| -se- || {{sc|nas}}-ce- || -nęce- || -ćesse- || -ćęhce- || -kse-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In lexically intransitive verbs with an applicative prefix, two &amp;quot;absolutive intransitive&amp;quot; markers may be combined if both arguments of the verb are 3rd person, but belong to different noun classes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Where several variants for the intransitive form are given, the first is used after oral vowels, the second is used after nasal vowels, and the third is used after consonants (e.g. when preceded by the inferred evidential &#039;&#039;&#039;-loʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
* When following a consonant other than /t ts tʃ k ʔ/, the 3/4p.I intransitive marker simplifies to &#039;&#039;&#039;-o-&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* When following a consonant, all &amp;quot;{{sc|nas}}&amp;quot; in the {{sc|1sg.erg}} column are replaced by the overt vowel &#039;&#039;&#039;-ę-&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The {{sc|1sg.erg}}&amp;gt;3/4p.I.{{sc|abs}} suffix is {{sc|del}}&#039;&#039;&#039;-ǫma-&#039;&#039;&#039; only if another morpheme follows. In word-final position it is &#039;&#039;&#039;-neho&#039;&#039;&#039; instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* Likewise, the 3/4p.{{sc|erg&amp;gt;1sg.abs}} suffix is &#039;&#039;&#039;-kna&#039;&#039;&#039; if another morpheme follows, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-ką&#039;&#039;&#039; when word-final.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that the preceding vowel is deleted before adding this suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|nas}} indicates that the preceding vowel is nasalized.&lt;br /&gt;
* The bracketed (h) in the 2nd person absolutive series vanishes when word-final or preceding a glottal consonant.&lt;br /&gt;
* Most of the 3/4p absolutive morphemes (excepting those for classes III and VI and those of the 3rd/4th person ergative series) drop their final vowel when followed by another morpheme that does not start with a consonant cluster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aspect, negation and speech act markers ===&lt;br /&gt;
Two aspectual morphemes have been grammaticalized in Tmaśareʔ. The completive aspect indicates that the action described by the verb has been or will be successfully completed, and the progressive aspect indicates that the action was/is/will be ongoing at the time of reference. Both of these aspects are relatively rare in main clauses, but common in subordinated clauses. Verb forms unmarked for aspect do not specify the status of completion and usually have a generic habitual or aorist meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* completive ({{sc|cpl}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-mo-&#039;&#039;&#039; or {{sc|del}}&#039;&#039;&#039;-ǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* progressive ({{sc|prog}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-kiʔ(k)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Verbs can be negated with a negative suffix, which indicates that the action did not occur, or that it is not expected to happen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* negative ({{sc|neg}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ye&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;-(i)hma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, non-declarative speech acts may be marked with suffixes that appear at the very end of the verb. Their use is fairly straightforward: The interrogative is used in questions, and the irrealis is used in conditional clauses, when referring to hypothetical or future events, and in imperative statements. Both the interrogative and the irrealis do not usually co-occur with evidentiality marking; however, the latter is not ungrammatical, and some specific combinations are not all that rare (for instance, the irrealis combined with the assumed evidential signals a conditional clause).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* interrogative ({{sc|q}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-wi&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* irrealis ({{sc|irr}}): &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔi&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In theory, the suffixes for aspect, negation and speech act occupy different slots in the verbal template. However, the degree of fusion is such that their surface forms depend rather strongly on contiguous affixes, and the negative morpheme even has a suppletive variant in some circumstances. For convenience, the following tables list all possible combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;fl c&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-right:1em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c fl}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! polarity →&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; | affirmative &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! aspect →&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; generic &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | completive&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | progressive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! speech act ↓&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! declarative&lt;br /&gt;
| -Ø || -mo || -kiʔ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! interrogative&lt;br /&gt;
| -wi/-mi || {{sc|del}}-ǫmi || -kiʔkwi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! irrealis&lt;br /&gt;
| -ʔi || {{sc|del}}-ǫʔi || -kiʔki&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;fl c&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-right:1em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg c fl}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! polarity →&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; | negative&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! aspect →&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; generic &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | completive&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | progressive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! speech act ↓&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! declarative&lt;br /&gt;
| -(i)hma || {{sc|del}}-ǫńe || -kiʔće&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! interrogative&lt;br /&gt;
| -yewi/-hmawi || {{sc|del}}-ǫńewi || -kiʔćewi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! irrealis&lt;br /&gt;
| -yeʔi/-hmaʔi || {{sc|del}}-ǫńeʔi || -kiʔćeʔi&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;visualClear&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that the preceding vowel is deleted before adding this suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
* The generic aspect negative marker is usually &#039;&#039;&#039;-hma&#039;&#039;&#039;, but the vowels /a e/ in preceding 3/4p absolutive markers for classes I, II, IV, V, and VII are changed to /i/. In the interrogative and irrealis, the forms with &#039;&#039;&#039;-hma-&#039;&#039;&#039; are used in verbs with a 1st or 2nd person absolutive participant, and the forms with &#039;&#039;&#039;-ye-&#039;&#039;&#039; in verbs with a 3rd person absolutive participant.&lt;br /&gt;
* The generic aspect interrogative marker is &#039;&#039;&#039;-wi&#039;&#039;&#039; after consonants and oral vowels, and &#039;&#039;&#039;-mi&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasal vowels.&lt;br /&gt;
* Both &#039;&#039;&#039;-(i)hma&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔi&#039;&#039;&#039; drop their initial glottal consonant if the preceding syllable contains coda /h/.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Verbal nouns ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several distinct types of verb nominalization in Tmaśareʔ; most of these work on the lexical level and will be covered in the derivation section below. However, one such formation, simply called the &#039;&#039;verbal noun&#039;&#039; ({{sc|vn}}), features prominently in subordinate clauses and therefore warrants a discussion here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Verbal nouns are formed with the suffix &#039;&#039;&#039;-mę&#039;&#039;&#039;, appended to a verb that may be fully inflected, but will usually not even take evidentiality markers or, for intransitive verbs, participant suffixes. Instead, subjects of intransitive verbs and agents of transitive verbs are specified by prefixes that are identical in form to the possessive prefixes for inalienably possessed nouns. Patients or themes of transitive verbs as well as applied objects of applicative verbs take normal absolutive agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subclauses, all arguments of verbal nouns may be overtly present as noun phrases, with the subject marked for the genitive instead of the ergative or absolutive case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ćehpo ćośśatmę&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo-Ø ć-ośśa-ta-mę&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS 2SG.POSS-kill-3.II-VN&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;your killing of the deer&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;macoʔ ecwayahcnąmę&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;maci-oʔ e-cwaya-hca-ną-mę&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;bear-GEN 3SG.POSS-fight-towards-1PL-VN&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the bear&#039;s attack on us&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Derivation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ does not have a separate class of adjectives, and only a small number of lexical adverbs. It makes up for this with a large number of derivational morphemes that can be used to create new words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjectival prefixes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectival prefixes can be added to almost any nominal, including pronouns. They cover a wide range of attributive meanings, which may be stacked upon each other if the combination makes sense semantically. The list is too large to be given here; adjectival prefixes are therefore found in the lexicon.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With nouns, adjectival prefixes are added before the (possibly plural-marked) stem, but after any possessive or demonstrative prefixes. With pronouns they appear at the beginning of the word, even with correlative pronouns that include a deictic morpheme in their stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;mahkapsanǫ&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;mahka=psanǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;sharp=knife&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;a sharp knife&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;śekcehkpehkekehka&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śe=kceh=kpeh=ke~kehka&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this=dirty=dry=PL~rock&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;these dirty dry rocks&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Cmaʔoʔoha rohkeya wekco twehalloʔkahke.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;cma=o~oha-Ø roh=keya-Ø wek-co twe-hala-loʔ-kahke&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;red=PL~bean-ABS good=soil-ABS quick-ADV LOC-grow-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.IV&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Red beans grow quickly in good soil.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The meaning of adjectival prefixes can be reversed by adding &#039;&#039;&#039;i-&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;iʔ-&#039;&#039;&#039; before vowels), and intensified by adding &#039;&#039;&#039;cpo-&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;icictoca&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;i=cic=toca&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;not=centrally_located=house&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;a house at the edge of the village&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;nacpokahtomina&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-cpo=kahto=mina&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-very=gentle=mother&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;my affectionate mother&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derivational suffixes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second set of derivational morphemes consists of suffixes that change the meaning of a root, instead of adding an attributive property. These suffixes are stem extensions; that is, they are added after the root (often with deletion of a vowel), forming a new stem that inflects according to the vowel in the suffix. Interestingly, some of these morphemes contain an &amp;quot;echo vowel&amp;quot;, i.e. a copy of the original thematic vowel. When combined with vowel deletion, such suffixes look like an infix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following symbols are used in the tables below:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{sc|del}} indicates that a preceding vowel is deleted unless the resulting cluster would be illegal.&lt;br /&gt;
* V represents an echo copy of the underlying stem vowel. If bracketed, it appears only word-finally.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ṽ stands for a copy of an underlying nasalized stem vowel.&lt;br /&gt;
* A bracketed final (h) does not appear before &#039;&#039;&#039;ʔ h&#039;&#039;&#039; or word-finally, and it coalesces with following prevocalic &#039;&#039;&#039;s ś&#039;&#039;&#039; into a geminate version of the latter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Nominalizers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg4 bold&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| suffix || usage || etymology &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; || example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-cV-&#039;&#039;&#039; / {{sc|del}}&#039;&#039;&#039;-ęńṼ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, agent nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-dayV-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;ćihtaca&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;mentor&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;ćihta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;teach&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-nǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, instrument nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-dzũ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;meʔśonǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;needle&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;meʔśo-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;sew&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-mę-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, action nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-γʷĩ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;mihmę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;absence, omission&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;mihe-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;be absent&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ha-&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;-Ṽna-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, result nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-ła-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;polaha&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;gift&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;pola-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;donate&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-pV-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V → N, patient/theme nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | {{gray|&amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-pV-&#039;&#039;}} &amp;lt;!--(as in PW &#039;&#039;*yatʰapa&#039;&#039; &#039;garden&#039; ← &#039;&#039;*yatʰa-&#039;&#039; &#039;cultivate&#039;)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;lǫćpa&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;trade item&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;lǫća-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;exchange, trade, share&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ńę-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N → N, goal/recipient nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-γẽ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;pątańę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;goal, target, destination&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;pąta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;reach for&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-ma-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, location nominalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*ma&#039;&#039; &#039;place&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;śeʔtama&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;channel, ditch, moat&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;śeʔta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;flow&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-laho-&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;-namṼ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, related male person&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-lawV-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;comalaho&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;storyteller&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;coma&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;story, legend&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-kę-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, related female person&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-kĩ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kwelkę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;girl&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kwela&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;child&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-kV(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → N, related thing&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-kʰa-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;yećka&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;quiver&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;yeći&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;arrow&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-sso-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N → N, object made of X&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-słu-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tolasso&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;thread, twine&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;tola&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;wool&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-cǫ-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N → N, collective (only with animals &amp;amp; plants)&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-cũ-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kwohcǫ&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;pack of wolves&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kwoho&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;wolf&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-to-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre/Adv → N, abstraction, collective&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-tu-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;cohto&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;courage, energy&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;coh-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;strong, manly&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Verbalizers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg4 bold&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| suffix || usage || etymology || example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔyV-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre → V, stative verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-ʔayV-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;otwaʔya-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;resemble, match&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;otwa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;similar&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-hpa-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre → V, dynamic verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-łpa-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kayahpa-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;burn&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kaya&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;fire&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-ta(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/Pre → V, dynamic verbalizer (intensive, factitive)&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*tʰa-&#039;&#039; &#039;do, make&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kolta-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;gouge, drill, pierce&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kolo&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hole&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔna-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/V → V, permissive/factitive verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*ʔẽdza-&#039;&#039; &#039;give&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;eniʔna-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;entrust to&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;eni-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;be equipped with&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćka-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/PP/Pre → V, durative verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*čeka-&#039;&#039; &#039;sit&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;yeyaćka-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;listen to&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;yeya-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;hear&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-twi(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/Pre → V, inchoative/evolutive verbalizer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*tʰuya-&#039;&#039; &#039;become&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;kpehtwi-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;become dry&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;kpeh-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;dry&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other derivational morphology ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{browntable|lightbrownbg l}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- class=&amp;quot;bg4 bold&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| suffix || usage || etymology || example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-co-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/V/Pre → Adv, general adverbializer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*-cu-&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;yelco&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;else, otherwise&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;yel-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;different&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;-hą-&#039;&#039;&#039; / ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-ną-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | N/Pre → Adv, manner adverbializer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*łãγa&#039;&#039; &#039;spirit&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;śaʔną&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;intentionally, on purpose&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;śaʔę&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;mind&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ({{sc|del}})&#039;&#039;&#039;-męt(V)-&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | V/N/PP → Adv, directional/purposive adverbializer&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &amp;lt; &#039;&#039;*γʷĩta&#039;&#039; &#039;wind&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;bg2&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;nokmęti&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;backwards, the other way around&#039; ← &#039;&#039;&#039;noki-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;turn (sth.)&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compounding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compounding is a highly productive device to create new lexical items. Almost all content morphemes can be freely combined head-finally, provided the head is a noun or a verb. Adpositions can also be the head of a compound; however, this is not quite as productive and happens only when the modifier is an adposition or particle. Compounds of more than two parts can always be decomposed into smaller binary head-final compounds. In theory, arbitrarily long words are possible with this strategy, but Tmaśareʔ speakers tend not to create lexical stems consisting of more than four or five distinct lexical morphemes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;hapaʔtkwoćę&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hapaʔta-kwoćę&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;shoot-sinew&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;bow&#039;&#039; (n.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;eńopaho-&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;eńo-paho-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;again-walk&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;return&#039;&#039; (v.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Syntax =&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ syntax is mostly left-branching, with postpositions, modifiers preceding their heads, and basic &#039;&#039;&#039;SOV&#039;&#039;&#039; word order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The noun phrase ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Simple noun phrases ===&lt;br /&gt;
A noun phrase consists of a nominal head, optionally preceded by one or more modifiers (numerals, other noun phrases, postpositional phrases, or relative clauses). The heads of modifying NPs are cast in the genitive case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;hąse&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hąse-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;horse-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;a horse&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;soʔ kakca&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-oʔ ka~kaca-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-GEN PL~friend-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;our friends&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;aśǫʔ etęʔpi&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;aśę-oʔ e-tęʔpi-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;woman-GEN 3SG.POSS-daughter-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the woman&#039;s daughter&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;kahpoʔ laʔ orata kąʔmera&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kahpa-oʔ laʔ ora-ta-Ø kąʔ=mera-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;tree-GEN under five-CL.II-ABS black=dog-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the five black dogs under the tree&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Postpositional phrases ===&lt;br /&gt;
A postpositional phrase is made up of a postposition, preceded by a noun phrase in the genitive case. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;cǫńąkoʔ mnąʔco&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;cǫ=yąki-oʔ mnąʔco&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;long=river-GEN downward&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;down along the long river&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;tkwoʔ tnęcpątanǫʔ śe&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;tkwe-oʔ t=nęc=pątanǫ-oʔ śe&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2PL-GEN that=straight=road-GEN via&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;by means of that straight road of yours&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordinated phrases ===&lt;br /&gt;
Noun phrases can be coordinated with a number of conjunctions, which behave like enclitics attaching to the head of the last phrase to be coordinated. The most relevant phrase-joining conjunctions are &#039;&#039;&#039;=ʔma&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;and&amp;quot;, &#039;&#039;&#039;=so&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;or&amp;quot;, &#039;&#039;&#039;=śo&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;neither/nor&amp;quot;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;=ća&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;either/or&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;yoma mahńę śeśehoʔma&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yoma-Ø mahńę-Ø śe~śeho-Ø=ʔma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;sun-ABS moon-ABS PL~star-ABS=and&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;sun, moon, and stars&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;nǫńoći kńąhkwitaso&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;nǫ-yoći-Ø kńąh-kwita-Ø=so&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;thick=fish-ABS thin=OBV.II.SG-ABS=or&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;the fat fish or the thin one&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The clause ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Intransitive clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive clauses minimally consist of an inflected verb with an absolutive agreement marker. The subject NP, which may be omitted if reference is clear from context, takes the absolutive case and normally precedes the verb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yeleʔcoʔǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yele-ʔco-ʔo-ɴ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;run-away-DIR-1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I run away.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hora oleyahmo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hora-Ø ole-ya-ho-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;chief-ABS die-VIS-3.I-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The chief has died.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transitive clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Transitive clauses may take two or three core arguments (with mono- and ditransitive verbs respectively). All overt arguments must be placed on the same side of the verb, usually before it, with agents (marked with the ergative case) coming first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In monotransitive clauses, the verb is inflected to agree with both its arguments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyassǫ kęhtaʔǫtkiʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;keyassǫ-Ø kęhta-ʔo-ɴta-kiʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;wall-ABS build-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II-PROG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I am building a wall.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Maciʔ ńęʔka coheloʔkće.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;maci-eʔ ńęʔka-Ø cohe-loʔ-kće&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;bear-ERG honey-ABS find-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.V&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The bear finds honey.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Toʔ cǫccoʔ tohnęʔ naʔaśę olcamąkwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-oʔ cǫcca-oʔ tohną-eʔ na-aśę-Ø olca-mą-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-GEN family-GEN headman-ERG 1SG.POSS-wife-ABS hit-REP-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The headman of your family hit my wife!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ditransitive clauses have three arguments, two of them in the absolutive case. Only the agent and the primary object (typically in the semantic role of theme) will be marked on the verb; the secondary object (typically the recipient) does not trigger agreement. If both objects are represented in the clause by overt noun phrases, the secondary object NP precedes the primary object NP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Sohceʔ eʔaśę ećąke enayakta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sohca-eʔ e-aśę-Ø e-ćąke-Ø ena-ya-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;hunter-ERG 3SG.POSS-wife-ABS 3SG.POSS-skin-ABS give-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The hunter gives his wife its skin.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ditransitive clauses need not contain a lexically ditransitive verb though. They can also be formed by adding an applicative or causative marker to a monotransitive verb stem. The former operation promotes an oblique object to the primary object slot, the latter adds an agent in the ergative slot. In both cases, the displaced argument will be demoted to secondary object, ceasing to trigger agreement on the verb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwelkęʔ cocwa nǫćeyąsa meksoppeyeloʔktakiʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwelkę-eʔ co~cowa-Ø nǫće-yąsa-Ø mek-soppeye-loʔ-kta-kiʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;girl-ERG PL~fruit-ABS evening-meal-ABS BEN-gather-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.II-PROG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The girl is collecting fruit for dinner.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Teʔ na toca ćeltaraʔćessemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-eʔ na-Ø toca-Ø ćelta-ra-ʔo-ćesse-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-ERG 1SG-ABS house-ABS see-CAUS-DIR-2SG&amp;gt;3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;You showed me the house (lit. You made me see the house).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special type of monotransitive clause is formed when an intransitive verb is applicativized: the resulting clause will contain two absolutive-marked arguments but no ergative-marked one. In such clauses, the verb takes &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; agreement referring to the non-applied absolutive (i.e. the subject). If both arguments are 3rd person, but belong to different noun classes, absolutive markers are used for both - with the marker for the subject first and for the applied object second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Na kpahcǫ twepahoʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-Ø kpahcǫ-Ø twe-paho-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ABS forest-ABS LOC-walk-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I walk in the forest.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Heńaho malekehkwi kyehcakwessemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;heńaho-Ø male-kehkwi-Ø k-ye-hca-kwe-ho-se-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;priest-ABS sea-sand-ABS LAT-go-towards-ASS-3.I-3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The priest has gone to the seashore, I believe.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ is a pro-drop language; verbal arguments may be left out in transitive sentences just like in intransitive ones. Both agent and patient/theme may be omitted; however, applied objects may only be dropped if there is no other overt absolutive argument, and recipients may not be dropped at all. Monotransitive and applicative clauses therefore minimally consist of an inflected verb, whereas true ditransitives will always have at least one overt argument NP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kohpątaʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kohpa-ɴtah-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;follow-1SG&amp;gt;2SG-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I will follow you.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Tweśikąńahose.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;twe-śiką-ya-ho-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;LOC-stand-VIS-3.I-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He is standing there.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Napcaha ćihtaʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-pcaha-Ø ćihta-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-boy-ABS teach-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I&#039;m teaching it to my son.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Predication ===&lt;br /&gt;
Nominal or adjectivial predicates do not exist as a distinct clause type in Tmaśareʔ. Predication is achieved via ordinary clauses, using a wide variety of verbalizing suffixes that attach to the predicated nominal, adpositional, or adjectivial stem. The most common verbalizers used in predication are &#039;&#039;&#039;-ʔyV-&#039;&#039;&#039; (stative/gnomic), &#039;&#039;&#039;-ćka-&#039;&#039;&#039; (durative/situational), and &#039;&#039;&#039;-twi(h)-&#039;&#039;&#039; (evolutive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Na ćtohnąʔńaʔǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-Ø će-tohną-ʔyV-ʔo-ɴ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ABS 2SG.POSS-father-be-DIR-1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I am your father.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Saye tahnatwihpǫse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;saye-Ø tahna-twih-pǫ-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;night-ABS cold-become-SENS-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;It&#039;s getting cold tonight.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositional predicates normally occur in the form of applicative constructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćaćahkwoho soʔ toca tweyoćkapǫtase.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ća~ćahkwoho-Ø sa-oʔ toca-Ø twe-yo-ćka-pǫ-ta-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PL~hyaena-ABS 1PL-GEN house-ABS LOC-outside-DUR-SENS-3.II-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Hyaenae are outside our house.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yąsa mekihmahtaʔǫta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yąsa-Ø mek-ihma-hta-ʔo-ɴta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;food-ABS INSTR-without-RES-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I don&#039;t have any food (lit. I have ended up without food).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adverbs ===&lt;br /&gt;
A clause may optionally take one or more adjuncts, most commonly adverbs or postpositional phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postpositional adjuncts normally follow the verb, though they may be fronted to sentence-initial position when topicalized. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwela kahkwapǫmakiʔ lǫńomoʔ laʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwela-Ø kahkwa-pǫ-ma-kiʔ lǫ-yoma-oʔ laʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;child-ABS laugh-SENS-3.I-PROG warm=sun-GEN under&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The child is laughing in the sunlight.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbial adjuncts may appear almost anywhere in a sentence (but not between the two absolutive complements of a ditransitive clause); they are most commonly found right after the head of the first NP in the clause (Wackernagel&#039;s position). If the adjunct is a clause, it may occur initially or finally, but not in between other elements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hitkweleʔ wekco kahpa tahmorayakse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hit=kwela-eʔ wek-co kahpa-Ø tahmo-ra-ya-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;small=child-ERG quick-ADV tree-ABS fall-CAUS-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The little child quickly felled the tree.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kahkwaco, yokwoʔ toca kayahpamąsemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kahkwa-co, yokwe-oʔ toca-Ø kayahpa-mą-se-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;laugh-ADV PROX.I.PL-GEN house-ABS burn-REP-3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Amusingly, their house burnt down.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pcaheʔ toʔ mǫńo laʔpaloʔktaʔi oca.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;pcaha-eʔ ta-oʔ me~meńo-Ø laʔpa-loʔ-kta-ʔi oca&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;boy-ERG 2SG-GEN PL~sheep-ABS steal-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.II-IRR day_after_tomorrow&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The day after tomorrow the boy will try to steal your sheep.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Discourse particles ===&lt;br /&gt;
Discourse particles function a lot like sentential adverbs in that they commonly occur after the first phrase in a clause (or clause-initially if there are no overt participants or fronted adjuncts). Unlike true adverbs, however, they may not be moved to other positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Sa kehće yemahcaʔną.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-Ø kehće yema-hca-ʔo-ną&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ABS instead row-forward-DIR-1PL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Instead, we rowed onwards.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śeheʔ kwe hanelćoma wecokwektaʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śeho-eʔ kwe ha=nelćoma-Ø weco-kwe-kta-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this.I.SG-ERG but all=mushroom-ABS eat-ASS-3&amp;gt;3.II-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;But I&#039;m sure that he will eat all the mushrooms!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Questions are formed by inflecting the verb for the interrogative mood. If a specific sentence constituent is being asked about, an interrogative pronoun or a query proclitic will be used in addition to verbal inflection. No wh-movement takes place. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wila ćiyećehwi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;wi=la-Ø ćiye-ćeho-wi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Q=man-ABS want-2SG&amp;gt;3.I-Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Which man do you like?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Twi kwoho sohoćehtǫmi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;twi kwoho-Ø soho-ćehta-ǫmi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;yesterday wolf-ABS catch-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL:Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Did you catch the wolf yesterday?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śeheʔ, kwoho twi sohoktǫmi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śeho-eʔ, kwoho-Ø twi soho-kta-ǫmi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this.I-ERG, wolf-ABS yesterday catch-3&amp;gt;3.II-CPL:Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Was it him who caught the wolf yesterday?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wita roʔ teʔ twi sohoćehtǫmi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;wita-Ø roʔ ta-eʔ twi soho-ćehta-ǫmi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;what.II-ABS therefore 2SG-ERG yesterday catch-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL:Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;What did you catch yesterday then?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Serial verb constructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tmaśareʔ permits two kinds of verb serialization that appear to work within a single syntactic clause. The first of these looks like verb-verb compounding on the morphological level, but its semantics are different in that it portrays several distinct actions as happening simultaneously, and being performed by the same participants. This type of construction works only for verbs that would share the exact same morphology (including derivational suffixes) when free-standing. This morphology is used only once, with all the verb roots combined into a single composite stem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kana ćawińęsaśętayaho.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kana-Ø ćawi=ńęsa=śęta-ya-ho&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;group_of_people-ABS smile=dance=sing-VIS-3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The group of people laughed and danced and sang (all at the same time).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second type of verb serialization, which is formed by simply concatenating several fully inflected verbs with the clitic conjunction &#039;&#039;&#039;=ʔma&#039;&#039;&#039; added to the last verb in the chain, does not require identical morphology, and is thus much more flexible. However, it still requires identical morphologically relevant participants. When contrasted against the compositional method of serial verb formation, it portrays the actions as closely linked but non-simultaneous, following each other in short succession.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kana ćawiyaho ńęsayaho śętayahoʔma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kana-Ø ćawi-ya-ho ńęsa-ya-ho śęta-ya-ho=ʔma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;group_of_people-ABS smile-VIS-3.I dance-VIS-3.I sing-VIS-3.I=and&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The group of people laughed, then they danced, and then they sang.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Complex sentences ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Coordinate clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinate clauses are formed with a conjunction, which is inserted right after the head of the first phrase in the second clause. If that clause does not contain an overt NP, or if the first NP is modified by a relative clause, the conjunction is added between the two coordinated clauses instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Weye kpahohcmąkse tma ca twekęhtatocamąksemo.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;weye-Ø k-paho-hca-mą-kse t=ma-Ø ca twe-kęhta-&amp;lt;toca&amp;gt;-mą-kse-mo&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;hill-ABS LAT-walk-towards-REP-3&amp;gt;3.VII that=place-ABS and LOC-build-&amp;lt;house&amp;gt;-REP-3&amp;gt;3.VII-CPL&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They say he went up the hill and built a house there.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Teʔ maci cohećehtwi, ćehahoʔ aro so wetaʔcotkiʔkwi?&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-eʔ maci-Ø cohe-ćehta-wi, će-ha~ha-oʔ aro so weta-ʔco-ta-kiʔk-wi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-ERG bear-ABS discover-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-Q, 2SG.POSS-PL~eye-GEN from or turn-away-3.II-PROG-Q&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Did you see the bear, or was it hiding from your eyes?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the two conjoined clauses have the same topic appearing in different roles, pronouns will be used to clarify. In the following example, the horse is both topic and patient in both clauses, but the verb of the first clause is applicativized, which demotes the horse from primary to secondary absolutive. Accordingly, the pronoun &#039;&#039;&#039;yata&#039;&#039;&#039; is used in primary absolutive position to indicate that the second clause focuses on the horse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Teʔ hąse ćopńę kyehcasćesseʔi, yata śeʔ siśęnaćehtihma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-eʔ hąse-Ø ćopńę-Ø k-ye-hca-s-ćesse-ʔi, yata-Ø śeʔ siśę-na-ćehta-ihma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-ERG horse-ABS water_place-ABS LAT-move-towards-CAUS-2SG&amp;gt;3.VII-IRR, PROX.II.SG-ABS however drink-CAUS-2SG&amp;gt;3.II-NEG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;You can lead a horse to water, but you can&#039;t make it drink.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next sentence, note the seemingly reversed use of proximative and obviative pronouns. By referring to the chief with the proximative even though he is not the subject of the transitive first clause, it becomes possible to track him as the subject of the intransitive second clause without having to use an overt resumptive pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwakwiʔ yaho ińeʔnahorapǫkwa tǫ sǫskwacolaćkaloʔwa ceʔkoʔ sąʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwakwe-eʔ yaho-Ø ińe-ʔna=hora-pǫ-kwa tǫ sǫs=kwaco-la-ćka-loʔ-wa ceʔka-oʔ sąʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;OBV.I.PL-ERG PROX.I.SG-ABS name-FACT=chief-SENS-3&amp;gt;3.I because primary=strength-man-DUR-EVID-3.I tribe-GEN in&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They chose him as chief because they considered him the bravest man in the tribe (lit. because he was obviously the man with the greatest amount of &#039;&#039;&#039;kwaco&#039;&#039;&#039;).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Relative clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses precede their antecedents. They are formed with an introductory pronoun agreeing in noun class and number with the relativized nominal - usually a demonstrative, but indefinite quantifying pronouns and ordinary 3rd/4th person pronouns are also seen. The relativized noun itself may be preceded by a deictic proclitic for emphasis or disambiguation; if the relative clause is introduced with a 3rd/4th person pronoun and the relativized noun is not possessed, this deictic is mandatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no syntactic or inflectional difference between stand-alone relative clauses and full main clauses, except that the introductory pronoun in relative clauses may not be omitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śehke soppeyeʔnękmo yolći kwisayakahke.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;śehke-Ø soppeye-ʔo-nęki-mo yolći-Ø kwisa-ya-kahke&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this.IV.SG-ABS gather-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.IV-CPL millet-ABS grind-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.IV&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;She is grinding the millet that we gathered.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yaho na cwihoraʔką śeleʔ namina yaśiloʔkwihma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yaho-Ø na-Ø ca-wihora-ʔo-ką śe=la-eʔ na-mina-Ø yaśi-loʔ-kwa-ihma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.SG-ABS 1SG-ABS BEN-give_birth-DIR-3&amp;gt;1SG this=man-ERG 1SG.POSS-mother-ABS marry-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.I-NEG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The man who fathered me did not marry my mother.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In relative clauses introduced with a quantifier, the meaning is partitive if a demonstrative proclitic is added to the relativized noun. If no demonstrative is present, the quantity is absolute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kweʔ cwayayakta śeleʔ na twihke enaʔkahke roʔoha hą kwekmǫkiʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwa-eʔ cwaya-ya-kta śe=la-eʔ na-Ø twihke-Ø ena-ʔo-kahke ra-o~oha-Ø hą kwekwo-ɴki-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;OBV.I.SG-ERG fight-VIS-3&amp;gt;2SG this=man-ERG 1SG-ABS some.IV-ABS give-DIR-3&amp;gt;3.IV that=PL~bean-ABS then cook-1SG&amp;gt;3.IV-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I might as well cook some of those beans that the man who I saw fight you gave to me.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oblique arguments cannot be relativized directly, and relativized nouns cannot take an oblique syntactic role within the relative clause either. Both situations are resolved by using applicative verbs, which promote the applied object to the core absolutive slot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Seʔ hahąse śeśi twećeltaʔnęcmo olco keńopahcaʔnęce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-eʔ ha~hąse-Ø śeśi-Ø twe-ćelta-ʔo-nęce-mo olco-Ø k-eńopaho-hca-ʔo-nęce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ERG PL~horse-ABS this.VII.SG-ABS LOC-see-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.VII-CPL location-ABS LAT-return-towards-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We went back to the place where we saw the horses.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Complement clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Complement clauses are typically formed as a verbal noun, with agents and intransitive subjects being agreed with by means of nominal possessive prefixes instead of the usual verbal participant suffixes. (Transitive patients are still marked on the verb in the normal fashion though.) Any overt subject or agent in a complement clause appears in the genitive case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The complementized verb itself is treated as a class VII noun for any agreement purposes in the matrix clause. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćośśahomęʔ ahparaʔką.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ć-ośśa-ho-mę-eʔ ahpara-ʔo-ką&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG.POSS-kill-3.I-VN-ERG anger-DIR-3&amp;gt;1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;That you killed him angers me.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Emineʔ etęʔpi ececemę ćihtayakse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;e-mina-eʔ e-tęʔpi-Ø e-cece-mę-Ø ćihta-ya-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3SG.POSS-mother-ERG 3SG.POSS-daughter-ABS 3SG.POSS-prepare_leather-VN-ABS teach-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The mother teaches her daughter to prepare leather.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second type of complement clause is formed like an ordinary main clause that follows the matrix verb, and is itself terminated with the {{sc|prox.VII.sg}} pronoun &#039;&#039;&#039;yaśe&#039;&#039;&#039;. This construction is preferred in situations where the subclause contains several overt participants and/or adjuncts, but it can only be used in the primary absolutive role of non-applicativized verbs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yekonęceʔi sorohca eńopahcayahmo weweloʔ aro ląsćehącǫʔ oma yaśe.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yeko-nęce-ʔi so~sohca-Ø eńopaho-hca-ya-ho-mo we~weli-oʔ aro ląc=ćehącǫ-oʔ oma yaśe-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;honor-1PL&amp;gt;3.VII-IRR PL~hunter-ABS return-towards-VIS-3.I-CPL PL~mountain-GEN from much=game-GEN with PROX.VII.SG-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Let us celebrate that the hunters have returned from the mountains with a good catch.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adverbial clauses ===&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbial clauses are formed with a nominalized verb as the object of a postposition. As with nominalized complement clauses, overt subjects of the subclause are cast in the genitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ikpahohcamomǫʔ oma pahoʔconąʔi.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ik-paho-hca-mo-mę-oʔ oma paho-ʔco-ną-ʔi&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2PL.POSS-walk-towards-CPL-VN-GEN with walk-away-1PL-IRR&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We will leave when you arrive.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Maci pątaʔcoʔnętamo yatoʔ ńęʔka ewecoyaćkiʔmǫʔ sąʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;maci-Ø pąta-ʔco-ʔo-nęta-mo yata-oʔ ńęʔka-Ø e-weco-ya-će-kiʔ-mę-oʔ sąʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;bear-ABS reach-away-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.II-CPL PROX.II.SG-GEN honey-ABS 3SG.POSS-eat-VIS-3.V-PROG-VN-GEN at&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We sneaked away from the bear while it was eating honey.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kńaćkamęno ćtwećekamǫʔ sąʔ, yeyeći laʔpaloʔkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kńaćka-mę-ro-Ø ć-twe-ćeka-mę-oʔ sąʔ, ye~yeći-Ø laʔpa-loʔ-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;sit.together-VN-HON-ABS 2SG.POSS-LOC-sit-VN-GEN at, PL~arrow-ABS steal-EVID-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He must have stolen the arrows when you were attending the village meeting.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Valence adjustment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Causativization ===&lt;br /&gt;
Causativization increases the valence of a verb by adding an agent. When added to lexically intransitive verbs where the subject is an experiencer, the [[#Causative|causative suffix]] simply adds an ergative argument, which is typically interpreted as bringing about the state that the subject is experiencing. This type of causativization can be combined with an applicative prefix, with no major effect on the semantics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Kwela ńępeyaho.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;kwela-Ø ńępe-ya-ho&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;child-ABS sleep-VIS-3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The child sleeps.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Emineʔ ekwela ńępe{{red|ra}}yakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;e-mina-eʔ e-kwela-Ø ńępe-{{red|ra}}-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3SG.POSS-mother-ERG 3SG.POSS-child-ABS sleep-{{red|CAUS}}-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The mother puts her child to sleep.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Emineʔ ekwela home meʔńępe{{red|ra}}yakse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;e-mina-eʔ e-kwela-Ø home-Ø mek-ńępe-{{red|ra}}-ya-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3SG.POSS-mother-ERG 3SG.POSS-child-ABS song-ABS INSTR-sleep-{{red|CAUS}}-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The mother puts her child to sleep with a lullaby.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to portray the causation of the described event as indirect and/or accidental, the added agent may be rendered as the object of the postposition &#039;&#039;&#039;elka&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;due to&#039; instead of appearing as a core argument in the ergative case (note the intransitive agreement suffix in the following example).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Tahmo{{red|ra}}ʔwa noʔ elka.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;tahmo-{{red|ra}}-ʔo-wa na-oʔ elka&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;fall-{{red|CAUS}}-DIR-3.I 1SG-GEN due_to&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I accidentally made him fall (lit. He was made to fall because of me).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Causativized intransitive verbs may also appear without any reference to the added agent at all. In such constructions, the verb generally takes on a permissive meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;La kipceʔ twole{{red|ra}}loʔwase.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;la-Ø kipceʔ-Ø twe-ole-{{red|ra}}-loʔ-wa-se&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;man-ABS desert-ABS LOC-die-{{red|CAUS}}-EVID-3.I-3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The man was left to die in the desert.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lexically transitive verb undergoes causativization, the original ergative argument is demoted to a secondary object, which will appear in the absolutive case but does not trigger verbal agreement. Semantically, the demoted agent usually retains its agentive role, and the new agent is understood to have played a key role in starting the action performed by the demoted agent. Again, indirect causation may be indicated by casting the causer as an oblique argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Soleʔ aśę yaho tǫhno{{red|s}}kwekwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;solo-eʔ aśę-Ø yaho-Ø tǫhno-{{red|s}}-kwe-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;warrior-ERG woman-ABS PROX.I.SG-ABS have_sex_with-{{red|CAUS}}-ASS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The warrior forced the woman to fuck him, I guess.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Toʔ tatahkoʔ elka, na toʔ śelehe ćosą{{red|na}}pǫkse.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ta-oʔ ta~tahka-oʔ elka, na-Ø ta-oʔ śe~śehe-Ø ćosą-{{red|na}}-pǫ-kse&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2SG-GEN PL~effort-GEN due_to, 1SG-ABS 2SG-GEN PL~goal-ABS be_curious_about-{{red|CAUS}}-SENS-3&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Your actions have made me curious about your goals (lit. Because of your actions, I have been made curious about your goals).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ditransitive verbs can also be causativized. Since this creates a tetravalent verb, one of the four arguments must be expressed obliquely, either the original agent or the original secondary object. In the former case, the postpositions &#039;&#039;&#039;śe&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;via&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;nene&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;across&#039; can be used (with the second of these implying non-volitional involvement of the causee); in the latter case, the demoted secondary object may appear with almost any postposition, most typically &#039;&#039;&#039;kǫpe&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;towards&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pcahoʔ nene etohnęʔ kaca psanǫ ena{{red|s}}pǫkta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;pcaha-oʔ nene e-tohną-eʔ kaca-Ø psanǫ-Ø ena-{{red|s}}-pǫ-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;boy-GEN across 3SG.POSS-father-ERG friend-ABS knife-ABS give-{{red|CAUS}}-SENS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;His father made the boy give the knife to his friend (in spite of his objections).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ kwa kokwoho piʔehpa{{red|ra}}ʔǫtmo mǫńoʔ kǫpe.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ kwa-Ø kwo~kwoho-Ø piʔehpa-{{red|ra}}-ʔo-ɴta-mo me~meńo-oʔ kǫpe&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG OBV.I.SG-ABS PL~wolf-ABS protect_from-{{red|CAUS}}-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL PL~sheep-GEN towards&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I made him protect the sheep from wolves.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case a ditransitive verb is subject to both causativization and applicativization, it is common to incorporate the primary object into the verb in order to prevent the clause from having too many overt arguments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ kwa ćępesso mekpiʔehpa{{blue|kwoh}}{{red|ra}}ʔǫtmo mǫńoʔ kǫpe.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ kwa-Ø ćępesso-Ø mek-piʔehpa-{{blue|&amp;lt;kwoho&amp;gt;}}-{{red|ra}}-ʔo-ɴta-mo me~meńo-oʔ kǫpe&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG OBV.I.SG-ABS wooden_wall-ABS INSTR-protect_from-{{blue|&amp;lt;wolf&amp;gt;}}-{{red|CAUS}}-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.II-CPL PL~sheep-GEN towards&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I made him protect the sheep from wolves by a fence (lit. I made him wolf-protect the sheep by a fence).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== De-agentivization ===&lt;br /&gt;
To deemphasize the agent of a transitive verb and consequently emphasize the patient, the agent can be omitted. Note that the verb may or may not show agreement with the agent: In the first case, the focus is simply shifted towards the absolutive argument while the verb remains transitive; in the second case, the verb is instead detransitivized by removing all reference to the agent. For most verbs, detransitivization results in a mediopassive interpretation of the event. (A full passive can be formed by re-adding the agent as an oblique argument; the semantic connection between the agent and the patient remains fairly indirect though.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Sohceʔ ćehpo wecoyakta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sohca-eʔ ćehpo-Ø weco-ya-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;hunter-ERG deer-ABS eat-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The hunter ate the deer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćehpo wecoyakta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo-Ø weco-ya-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS eat-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He ate the deer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćehpo wecoyata.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo weco-ya-ta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS eat-VIS-3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The deer was eaten.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ćehpo wecoyata sohcoʔ elka.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ćehpo weco-ya-ta sohca-oʔ elka&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;deer-ABS eat-VIS-3.II hunter-GEN due_to&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The deer was eaten by the hunter (lit. because of the hunter).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reflexives and reciprocals ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reflexives and reciprocals are not formed by valence reduction. Instead, they are expressed by using a pronoun coreferential with the agent as the primary object of the verb, which itself takes transitive agreement. Typically, an anaphoric personal pronoun is used for this purpose, often prefixed with the deictic proclitic &#039;&#039;&#039;śe=&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;this&#039; or with the adjectival prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;tąc-&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;same&#039; (the former can be used for both reflexives and reciprocals, the latter for reflexives only). In 1st and 2nd person reflexives, the overt pronouns may be dropped because verbal agreement is unambiguous already.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yaheʔ (śe)yaho hesayakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yaho-eʔ (śe=)yaho-Ø hesa-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.SG-ERG (this=)PROX.I.SG-ABS cut-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;He cut himself.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hesapǫnna.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hesa-pǫ-nna&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;cut-SENS-1SG&amp;gt;1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I cut myself.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yokwiʔ (śe)yoʔ ćeltayakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yokwe-eʔ (śe=)yoʔ ćelta-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.PL-ERG (this=)PROX.I.PL.ABS see-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They see themselves. / They see each other.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Yokwiʔ tąćoʔ ćeltayakwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;yokwe-eʔ tąc=yoʔ ćelta-ya-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PROX.I.PL-ERG same=PROX.I.PL.ABS see-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;They see themselves (e.g. mirrored on the surface of water).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Noun incorporation ===&lt;br /&gt;
In order to deemphasize the patient and emphasize the agent, the patient can simply be omitted without valence adjustment, or it can be incorporated within the verb, which reduces the verb&#039;s valence by one and has the effect of portraying the patient as non-specific and the action as something conventionally done to patients of that sort. The incorporated object appears right after the verb stem (following any derivational morphemes but preceding suffixal inflection), and the agent is cast in the absolutive case:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ toca kęhtaʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ toca-Ø kęhta-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG house-ABS build-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I built the house.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Neʔ kęhtaʔǫce.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-eʔ kęhta-ʔo-ɴce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ERG build-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.VII&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I built it.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Na kęhta{{red|toca}}ʔǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-Ø kęhta-{{red|&amp;lt;toca&amp;gt;}}-ʔo-ɴ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG-ABS build-{{red|&amp;lt;house&amp;gt;}}-DIR-1SG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;I built a house (lit. I house-built).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ditransitive verbs, only the primary absolutive may be incorporated. The result is a monotransitive verb with an incorporated theme, which may then itself be detransitivized by removing the agent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Seʔ aśę pǫki enaʔnęńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-eʔ aśę-Ø pǫki-Ø ena-ʔo-nęta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ERG woman-ABS bowl-ABS give-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We gave the bowl to the woman.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Seʔ aśę ena{{red|pǫki}}ʔnęma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;sa-eʔ aśę-Ø ena-{{red|&amp;amp;lt;pǫki&amp;gt;}}-ʔo-nęma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1PL-ERG woman-ABS give-{{red|&amp;lt;bowl&amp;gt;}}-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;We gave the woman a bowl (lit. We bowl-gave the woman).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Aśę ena{{red|pǫki}}ʔwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;aśę-Ø ena-{{red|&amp;amp;lt;pǫki&amp;gt;}}-ʔo-wa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;woman-ABS give-{{red|&amp;lt;bowl&amp;gt;}}-DIR-3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The woman was given a bowl (lit. The woman was bowl-given).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicative verbs may incorporate either the patient or the applied object. However, the latter is only possible if the clause does not contain a patient (as the last two examples demonstrate), because even if noun class agreement would disambiguate in theory, any single overt absolutive argument of an applicative verb will be interpreted as the applied object. Note also that incorporated applied objects still trigger agreement on the verb, and that the agent consequently does not get promoted to absolutive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Natohnęʔ soha psanǫ mekośśamąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ soha-Ø psanǫ-Ø mek-ośśa-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG leopard-ABS knife-ABS INSTR-kill-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;My father killed the leopard with a knife.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Natohnęʔ psanǫ mekośśa{{red|soha}}mąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ psanǫ-Ø mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;soha&amp;gt;}}-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG knife-ABS INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;leopard&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;My father killed a leopard with the knife (lit. My father leopard-killed with the knife).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Natohnęʔ mekośśa{{red|psanǫ}}mąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;psanǫ&amp;gt;}}-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;knife&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;My father killed it with a knife (lit. My father knife-killed it).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;*Natohnęʔ soha mekośśa{{red|psanǫ}}mąkńǫ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ soha-Ø mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;psanǫ&amp;gt;}}-mą-kńǫ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG leopard-ABS INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;knife&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.III&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;(ungrammatical)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;*Natohnęʔ soha mekośśa{{red|psanǫ}}mąkta.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;na-tohną-eʔ soha-Ø mek-ośśa-{{red|&amp;lt;psanǫ&amp;gt;}}-mą-kta&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1SG.POSS-father-ERG leopard-ABS INSTR-kill-{{red|&amp;lt;knife&amp;gt;}}-REP-3&amp;gt;3.II&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;*My father killed a knife with the leopard. (nonsensical)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noun incorporation is not possible with verbs that are lexically intransitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Syntactic transformations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Topicalization ===&lt;br /&gt;
Almost any sentence constituent may be topicalized by being left-dislocated to the beginning of the clause. If the topicalized element is a 3rd person core argument of the verb (including applied objects), it is mandatorily co-referenced by an overt pronoun in the clause. Most commonly, proximate/obviative pronouns are used, although demonstratives are also seen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Śceʔkoʔ sąʔ, ikmǫna cą yaśiʔnęmihma.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ś=ceʔka-oʔ sąʔ, ik-mi~mina-Ø cą yaśi-ʔo-nęma-ihma&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;this=tribe-GEN in, 1PL.POSS-PL~mother-ABS EMPH marry-DIR-1PL&amp;gt;3.I-NEG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In this tribe, we do not marry our mothers.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Horoʔ etęʔpi, yaho tǫhnomąkwa.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;hora-oʔ e-tęʔpi-Ø, yaho-Ø tǫhno-mą-kwa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;chief-GEN 3SG.POSS-daughter-ABS, PROX.I.SG-ABS have_sex_with-REP-3&amp;gt;3.I&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The chief&#039;s daughter, that&#039;s who he apparently had sex with.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Argument postposing ===&lt;br /&gt;
Aside from topicalization, Tmaśareʔ permits another strategy for emphasis, which is right-dislocation of core arguments to the end of the clause. This construction is not particularly common, but increasingly being employed as a rhetorical device in storytelling and upper-register speech, and it is also used colloquially to convey enthusiasm or surprise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some important restrictions on the formation of postpositive constructions. Most significantly, if any of the core constituents of a transitive clause is moved (agent and patient in monotransitives, agent and theme in ditransitives), then the other core constituent will be postposed as well, or else omitted entirely. In fact, it is common to postpose only a single argument, and to drop all others. The recipient of a ditransitive verb will only appear as such in post-verbal position if there is also an overtly postposed or else incorporated theme; otherwise it will be converted into a benefactive applicative. Applied objects, on the other hand, may only be postposed if any other absolutive-marked participants are either non-overt or incorporated. Note also that the basic order of noun phrases remains the same as in ordinary head-final clauses (i.e. ergative, secondary absolutive, primary absolutive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Saląʔkną canę maciʔ.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;salą-ʔo-kną canę maci-eʔ&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;attack-DIR-3&amp;gt;1PL suddenly bear-ERG&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Suddenly a bear attacked us.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Enańępemęńakwa śehomiʔ ǫkkekwela.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;ena-&amp;lt;ńępe-mę&amp;gt;-ya-kwa śe=home-eʔ ǫk-ke~kwela-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;give-&amp;lt;sleep-VN&amp;gt;-VIS-3&amp;gt;3.I this=song-ERG 1PL.POSS-PL~child-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;This song seems to have put our children to sleep.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Nǫćoʔ ǫcąʔ caśętaʔǫma kcektęʔpi!&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;nǫće-oʔ ǫcąʔ ca-śęta-ʔo-ɴma k-cek=tęʔpi-Ø&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;evening-GEN during BEN-speak_poetically-DIR-1SG&amp;gt;3.I 3PL.POSS-beautiful=daughter-ABS&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;In the evening I really managed to have a flirt with their beautiful daughter!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Texts =&lt;br /&gt;
{{/Texts}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= See also =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[/Lexicon|Tmaśareʔ lexicon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sahaśe]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Western languages]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14988</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14988"/>
		<updated>2018-09-24T19:02:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Pronouns */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
These are the sound changes from Empotle7á. It&#039;s not entirely clear what dialect of Empotle7á Melì derives from, and some of the later changes on this list are dialectal or incomplete.&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Glottal Stop==&lt;br /&gt;
	ʔ → 0&lt;br /&gt;
==Merger of Back Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → 0 / N_#, ʔ_#, l_#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɨ/ʉ → i/y / _N, _j&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɤ/o&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Allophonic Rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
ɤ → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
y → i&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ø → e&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɒ → a&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Voiceless Laterals==&lt;br /&gt;
tɬʰ → tʰ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tɬ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬɬ → s&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬ → l / V_, N_&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Labiovelar Approximant==&lt;br /&gt;
wa → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wo → u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
we, wi → y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oo → o (only within morphemes)&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary vowel rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
im → ym / _#&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowel Deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
o, u → 0 / Vl_C&lt;br /&gt;
==Consonant Shift==&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ts → dz → z / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
pʰ → p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tʰ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tsʰ → ts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
kʰ → k&lt;br /&gt;
==Hiatus Dissimilation==&lt;br /&gt;
(propagates from the left to the right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o → a / _o, _u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u → o / _u&lt;br /&gt;
==Tonal Stress==&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˩ → V˥...V˥˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˥ → V˩...V˩...V˥&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˥ → V˥...V˥...V˥˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˩ → V˥˩...V˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˥...V˥ → V˩...V˥ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˩...V˩ → V˧...V˩ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
==Nasalization==&lt;br /&gt;
N → ŋ / _#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ŋ → ˜j / _V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
j → ˜j&lt;br /&gt;
==Elision of High Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], u[-stress] → 0 / #s_C(C)V&lt;br /&gt;
==Lenition of Stops==&lt;br /&gt;
b → β / V_&lt;br /&gt;
==Simplification of Vowel Clusters==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], e[-stress] → ˜j / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u[-stress], o[-stress], a[-stress] →  β / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], y[-stress] → yβ / _y&lt;br /&gt;
==Lateralization==&lt;br /&gt;
t → tɬ / _a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The alveolar stop t is pronounced tɬ before the vowel a. This is optional, and some speakers continue to use t. In either case the change is not written.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The forms in parentheses in the table below are more formal, mostly reserved for speaking to or about elders and people of high social status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta (sa)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te (se)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14987</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14987"/>
		<updated>2018-09-24T19:00:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Pronouns */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
These are the sound changes from Empotle7á. It&#039;s not entirely clear what dialect of Empotle7á Melì derives from, and some of the later changes on this list are dialectal or incomplete.&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Glottal Stop==&lt;br /&gt;
	ʔ → 0&lt;br /&gt;
==Merger of Back Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → 0 / N_#, ʔ_#, l_#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɨ/ʉ → i/y / _N, _j&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɤ/o&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Allophonic Rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
ɤ → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
y → i&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ø → e&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɒ → a&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Voiceless Laterals==&lt;br /&gt;
tɬʰ → tʰ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tɬ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬɬ → s&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬ → l / V_, N_&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Labiovelar Approximant==&lt;br /&gt;
wa → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wo → u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
we, wi → y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oo → o (only within morphemes)&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary vowel rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
im → ym / _#&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowel Deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
o, u → 0 / Vl_C&lt;br /&gt;
==Consonant Shift==&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ts → dz → z / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
pʰ → p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tʰ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tsʰ → ts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
kʰ → k&lt;br /&gt;
==Hiatus Dissimilation==&lt;br /&gt;
(propagates from the left to the right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o → a / _o, _u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u → o / _u&lt;br /&gt;
==Tonal Stress==&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˩ → V˥...V˥˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˥ → V˩...V˩...V˥&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˥ → V˥...V˥...V˥˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˩ → V˥˩...V˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˥...V˥ → V˩...V˥ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˩...V˩ → V˧...V˩ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
==Nasalization==&lt;br /&gt;
N → ŋ / _#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ŋ → ˜j / _V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
j → ˜j&lt;br /&gt;
==Elision of High Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], u[-stress] → 0 / #s_C(C)V&lt;br /&gt;
==Lenition of Stops==&lt;br /&gt;
b → β / V_&lt;br /&gt;
==Simplification of Vowel Clusters==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], e[-stress] → ˜j / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u[-stress], o[-stress], a[-stress] →  β / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], y[-stress] → yβ / _y&lt;br /&gt;
==Lateralization==&lt;br /&gt;
t → tɬ / _a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The alveolar stop t is pronounced tɬ before the vowel a. This is optional, and some speakers continue to use t. In either case the change is not written.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses. The forms in parentheses are more formal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta (sa)||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé (se)||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14970</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14970"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:43:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Onsets */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
These are the sound changes from Empotle7á. It&#039;s not entirely clear what dialect of Empotle7á Melì derives from, and some of the later changes on this list are dialectal or incomplete.&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Glottal Stop==&lt;br /&gt;
	ʔ → 0&lt;br /&gt;
==Merger of Back Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → 0 / N_#, ʔ_#, l_#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɨ/ʉ → i/y / _N, _j&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɤ/o&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Allophonic Rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
ɤ → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
y → i&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ø → e&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɒ → a&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Voiceless Laterals==&lt;br /&gt;
tɬʰ → tʰ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tɬ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬɬ → s&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬ → l / V_, N_&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Labiovelar Approximant==&lt;br /&gt;
wa → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wo → u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
we, wi → y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oo → o (only within morphemes)&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary vowel rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
im → ym / _#&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowel Deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
o, u → 0 / Vl_C&lt;br /&gt;
==Consonant Shift==&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ts → dz → z / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
pʰ → p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tʰ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tsʰ → ts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
kʰ → k&lt;br /&gt;
==Hiatus Dissimilation==&lt;br /&gt;
(propagates from the left to the right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o → a / _o, _u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u → o / _u&lt;br /&gt;
==Tonal Stress==&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˩ → V˥...V˥˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˥ → V˩...V˩...V˥&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˥ → V˥...V˥...V˥˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˩ → V˥˩...V˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˥...V˥ → V˩...V˥ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˩...V˩ → V˧...V˩ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
==Nasalization==&lt;br /&gt;
N → ŋ / _#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ŋ → ˜j / _V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
j → ˜j&lt;br /&gt;
==Elision of High Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], u[-stress] → 0 / #s_C(C)V&lt;br /&gt;
==Lenition of Stops==&lt;br /&gt;
b → β / V_&lt;br /&gt;
==Simplification of Vowel Clusters==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], e[-stress] → ˜j / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u[-stress], o[-stress], a[-stress] →  β / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], y[-stress] → yβ / _y&lt;br /&gt;
==Lateralization==&lt;br /&gt;
t → tɬ / _a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The alveolar stop t is pronounced tɬ before the vowel a. This is optional, and some speakers continue to use t. In either case the change is not written.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14969</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14969"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:42:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Sound Changes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
These are the sound changes from Empotle7á. It&#039;s not entirely clear what dialect of Empotle7á Melì derives from, and some of the later changes on this list are dialectal or incomplete.&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Glottal Stop==&lt;br /&gt;
	ʔ → 0&lt;br /&gt;
==Merger of Back Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → 0 / N_#, ʔ_#, l_#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɨ/ʉ → i/y / _N, _j&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɤ/o&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Allophonic Rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
ɤ → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
y → i&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ø → e&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɒ → a&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Voiceless Laterals==&lt;br /&gt;
tɬʰ → tʰ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tɬ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬɬ → s&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬ → l / V_, N_&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Labiovelar Approximant==&lt;br /&gt;
wa → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wo → u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
we, wi → y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oo → o (only within morphemes)&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary vowel rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
im → ym / _#&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowel Deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
o, u → 0 / Vl_C&lt;br /&gt;
==Consonant Shift==&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ts → dz → z / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
pʰ → p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tʰ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tsʰ → ts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
kʰ → k&lt;br /&gt;
==Hiatus Dissimilation==&lt;br /&gt;
(propagates from the left to the right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o → a / _o, _u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u → o / _u&lt;br /&gt;
==Tonal Stress==&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˩ → V˥...V˥˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˥ → V˩...V˩...V˥&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˥ → V˥...V˥...V˥˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˩ → V˥˩...V˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˥...V˥ → V˩...V˥ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˩...V˩ → V˧...V˩ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
==Nasalization==&lt;br /&gt;
N → ŋ / _#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ŋ → ˜j / _V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
j → ˜j&lt;br /&gt;
==Elision of High Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], u[-stress] → 0 / #s_C(C)V&lt;br /&gt;
==Lenition of Stops==&lt;br /&gt;
b → β / V_&lt;br /&gt;
==Simplification of Vowel Clusters==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], e[-stress] → ˜j / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u[-stress], o[-stress], a[-stress] →  β / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], y[-stress] → yβ / _y&lt;br /&gt;
==Lateralization==&lt;br /&gt;
t → tɬ / _a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14968</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14968"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:40:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Sound Changes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Glottal Stop==&lt;br /&gt;
	ʔ → 0&lt;br /&gt;
==Merger of Back Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → 0 / N_#, ʔ_#, l_#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɨ/ʉ → i/y / _N, _j&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɤ/o&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Allophonic Rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
ɤ → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
y → i&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ø → e&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɒ → a&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Voiceless Laterals==&lt;br /&gt;
tɬʰ → tʰ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tɬ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬɬ → s&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ɬ → l / V_, N_&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Labiovelar Approximant==&lt;br /&gt;
wa → o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wo → u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
we, wi → y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oo → o (only within morphemes)&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary vowel rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
im → ym / _#&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowel Deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
o, u → 0 / Vl_C&lt;br /&gt;
==Consonant Shift==&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ts → dz → z / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / N_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
pʰ → p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tʰ → t&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tsʰ → ts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
kʰ → k&lt;br /&gt;
==Hiatus Dissimilation==&lt;br /&gt;
(propagates from the left to the right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o → a / _o, _u&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u → o / _u&lt;br /&gt;
==Tonal Stress==&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˩ → V˥...V˥˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˥ → V˩...V˩...V˥&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˥ → V˥...V˥...V˥˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˩ → V˥˩...V˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˥...V˥ → V˩...V˥ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
V˩...V˩ → V˧...V˩ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
==Nasalization==&lt;br /&gt;
N → ŋ / _#&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ŋ → ˜j / _V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
j → ˜j&lt;br /&gt;
==Elision of High Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], u[-stress] → 0 / #s_C(C)V&lt;br /&gt;
==Lenition of Stops==&lt;br /&gt;
b → β / V_&lt;br /&gt;
==Simplification of Vowel Clusters==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], e[-stress] → ˜j / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
u[-stress], o[-stress], a[-stress] →  β / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], y[-stress] → yβ / _y&lt;br /&gt;
==Lateralization==&lt;br /&gt;
t → tɬ / _a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14967</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14967"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:39:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Sound Changes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Glottal Stop==&lt;br /&gt;
	ʔ → 0&lt;br /&gt;
==Merger of Back Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → 0 / N_#, ʔ_#, l_#&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɨ/ʉ → i/y / _N, _j&lt;br /&gt;
ɯ/u → ɤ/o&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Allophonic Rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
ɤ → o&lt;br /&gt;
y → i&lt;br /&gt;
ø → e&lt;br /&gt;
ɒ → a&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Voiceless Laterals==&lt;br /&gt;
tɬʰ → tʰ&lt;br /&gt;
tɬ → t&lt;br /&gt;
ɬɬ → s&lt;br /&gt;
ɬ → l / V_, N_&lt;br /&gt;
==Loss of Labiovelar Approximant==&lt;br /&gt;
wa → o&lt;br /&gt;
wo → u&lt;br /&gt;
we, wi → y&lt;br /&gt;
oo → o (only within morphemes)&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary vowel rounding==&lt;br /&gt;
im → ym / _#&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowel Deletion==&lt;br /&gt;
o, u → 0 / Vl_C&lt;br /&gt;
==Consonant Shift==&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
ts → dz → z / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / V[low]_&lt;br /&gt;
p → b / N_&lt;br /&gt;
t → d / N_&lt;br /&gt;
k → g / N_&lt;br /&gt;
pʰ → p&lt;br /&gt;
tʰ → t&lt;br /&gt;
tsʰ → ts&lt;br /&gt;
kʰ → k&lt;br /&gt;
==Hiatus Dissimilation==&lt;br /&gt;
(propagates from the left to the right)&lt;br /&gt;
o → a / _o, _u&lt;br /&gt;
u → o / _u&lt;br /&gt;
==Tonal Stress==&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˩ → V˥...V˥˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˥ → V˩...V˩...V˥&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˥...V˥ → V˥...V˥...V˥˩&lt;br /&gt;
V...V˩...V˩ → V˥˩...V˩...V˩&lt;br /&gt;
V˥...V˥ → V˩...V˥ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
V˩...V˩ → V˧...V˩ / #(C)_&lt;br /&gt;
==Nasalization==&lt;br /&gt;
N → ŋ / _#&lt;br /&gt;
ŋ → ˜j / _V&lt;br /&gt;
j → ˜j&lt;br /&gt;
==Elision of High Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], u[-stress] → 0 / #s_C(C)V&lt;br /&gt;
==Lenition of Stops==&lt;br /&gt;
b → β / V_&lt;br /&gt;
==Simplification of Vowel Clusters==&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], e[-stress] → ˜j / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
u[-stress], o[-stress], a[-stress] →  β / V_V&lt;br /&gt;
i[-stress], y[-stress] → yβ / _y&lt;br /&gt;
==Lateralization==&lt;br /&gt;
t → tɬ / _a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14966</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14966"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:29:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Word Formation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14965</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14965"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:28:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Word Formation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14964</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14964"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:28:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Word Formation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14963</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14963"/>
		<updated>2018-09-20T21:27:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Word Formation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly every root in Melì is one to three syllables. Besides verbs, nouns, and adjectives, there are two classes of adpositions, personal pronouns, demonstratives, numerals (collectively treated under Modifiers), adverbs, pronouns and demonstratives, and discourse particles. Verbal roots are classified by their inherent transitivity (either transitive or intransitive; thereare no ditransitive roots), but they also have other features that may be mentioned in the lexicon. For example some verbs of motion are inherently perfective or imperfective. A small closed class of nouns are inalienably possessed, and must carry a possession prefix. Adpositions come in two varieties: free and affixed. Free adpositions precede the head noun, and are uninflected. Affixed adpositions appear at the end of the noun phrase and affix to the final word in the phrase. In addition to their inherent meaning, roots can take on non-predictable meanings through derivational suffixes. Several derivational suffixes have been inherited from Empotle7á, many of which have become nearly obsolete. The chart below is not exhaustive, and only shows the most common examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Nominalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||null||an instance or example of an event&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lo||agentive, &amp;quot;-er&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kin||added to animal names to specify a female&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||jen||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||pâ||associated location&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||lâ||result&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||one||augmentative&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||u||diminutive&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Verbalizing&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||Root||Suffix||Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||ado||intensive, emphasis on completion or finality&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||verb||da||makes causative transitives from intransitives&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||kâ||to seek or become something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||ê||to be something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||sâ||to do something&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||noun||lan||to be similar to something&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14929</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14929"/>
		<updated>2018-09-12T15:40:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Modifiers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive pronouns are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the pronoun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14928</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14928"/>
		<updated>2018-09-12T15:39:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Arguments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nested Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entire clauses can behave like arguments. There are two ways to do this grammatically. One is with substantives, made by combining the cataphoric pronoun with a relative clause, and then treating the cataphoric pronoun as an argument. The other is to use a normal, unmodified clause. The latter is fairly restricted, mostly limited to psychic action, reported speech, or knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;tell her what happened.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[example: &amp;quot;forgot that...&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive demonstratives are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the demonstrative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14927</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14927"/>
		<updated>2018-09-12T15:34:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Modifiers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of modifiers after a noun is: adjective, genitive, number, relative clause. Attributive demonstratives are classed as adjectives, but they may also appear after genitives or numbers to emphasize the limiting effect of the demonstrative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14926</id>
		<title>Melì</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://akana.conlang.org/w/index.php?title=Mel%C3%AC&amp;diff=14926"/>
		<updated>2018-09-12T15:29:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mouse-tache: /* Relative Clauses */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Article}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Melì&#039;&#039;&#039; is a language in the Valley group of the [[Western languages|Western language]] family, spoken along the coastal corridor, a thin strip of land between the sea and the Western Plateau on the west coast of [[Peilaš |Peilaš ]]. It is a direct descendant of a dialect of [[Empotle7á|Empotle7á]], which was spoken in the same region around 2000 BYP.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Language&lt;br /&gt;
| color      = green&lt;br /&gt;
| language   = Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| phonetic   = [mɛ˥li˥˩]&lt;br /&gt;
| date       = 1200-900 BYP&lt;br /&gt;
| place      = Coastal Corridor&lt;br /&gt;
| speakers   = unknown&lt;br /&gt;
| script     = none attested&lt;br /&gt;
| family     = Western&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;Valley&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;Melì&lt;br /&gt;
| word-or    = VSO&lt;br /&gt;
| mor-type   =  agglutinating  &lt;br /&gt;
| morphalign = ERG-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
| author     = [[User:Arzena|Arzena]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Context=&lt;br /&gt;
The prestige dialect of Melì, the one described in this grammar, is spoken in and around the small town of Kesàmade around 1100 BYP. Kesàmade, sometimes known as Topaḍi was founded as a trading post for vessels hailing from the Lukpanic city-states early in their explorations of the coastal corridor and the Kipceʔ further to the south. These traders brought a more advanced society along with their superior technology, and the elites of Kesàmade have built a hybrid culture that draws considerably from Lukpanic society. Melì is unwritten, as the Lukpanic languages were at this early stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The local name for the coastal corridor is Asodeá. It is unclear how far from the town Melì is spoken, or whether it is mutually intelligible with other Valley dialects in the region, but the elites of Kesàmade clearly see it as their own sphere of influence in their dealings with traders from the north. The ruling family is alternately known as Tamazinò or Masìm, their adopted Lukpanic name (there is no evidence for this name in any Lukpanic language, suggesting that it is a local calque).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Religion at Kesàmade is highly synchratic. The indigenous concept of kozú, or life essence, is the focus of personal hygiene and moral purity, but cannibalism has disappeared completely. Instead worshipers appeal to a series of deities to guide them in cultivating their kozú, most of whom have transparently Lukpanic origins. Buckwheat never took root in the coastal corridor, but some new crops have become an important part of local agriculture, such as figs and Lukpanic varieties of beans. Millet is by far the most important source of calories, with strained yogurt and leafy herbs rounding out most meals. The region&#039;s sole contribution to agriculture is a local herb with edible seeds tasting something like a mix of coriander and fennel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Sound Changes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Phonology=&lt;br /&gt;
==Onsets==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! labial!! alveolar!! palatal!! velar&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! stops&lt;br /&gt;
| p b || t d || || k g&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! affricates &lt;br /&gt;
|  || ts || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! fricatives&lt;br /&gt;
| || s z || || &lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! nasals&lt;br /&gt;
| m || n || ||&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! approximants&lt;br /&gt;
|  || l|| j||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lateral approximant is realized as a voiceless fricative ɬ word-initially. The voiced plosives b is realized as voiced fricative β after vowels. The palatal approximant j causes nasalization on the preceding vowel within the same word. None of these alternations are reflected in writing, though when these or other alternations occur in an example there will be a phonetic transcription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vowels==&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Front!!Central!!Back&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! High&lt;br /&gt;
||i y|| ||u&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Mid&lt;br /&gt;
||e|| ||o&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Low&lt;br /&gt;
|| ||a|| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Syllable Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Melì has a simple syllable structure of (C)V(N,l), where N is a homorganic nasal. At the end of a word this nasal is pronounced ŋ and written n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every word belongs to one of a finite set of stress patterns. Stress patterns are not contrastive on words of one syllable, and all syllables before the last three can be predicted from the last three.&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! no pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! rising pattern&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... á&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 1&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... a ... à&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 2&lt;br /&gt;
|    a ... à ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! falling pattern 3&lt;br /&gt;
|    à ... a ... a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Words of the rising pattern have an acute mark on the stressed syllable, which is always final. The stressed syllable has a high tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a low tone. In words of more than two syllables the first syllable will have a medium tone. The penultimate syllable is often pronounced long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The falling patterns have a stressed syllable among the last three syllables, with a grave mark. The stressed syllable has a falling tone, while all previous syllables, except sometimes the first, have a high tone. If two or more unstressed syllables precede the stressed syllable, then the first syllable has a low tone. All syllables after the stressed syllable have a low tone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some suffixes impact word stress. These suffixes are marked with a circumflex in this grammar, e.g. the evidential marker &#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039;. After adding such a suffix, words with no pattern or falling patterns 2 or 3 take a rising pattern, while words with a rising pattern take falling pattern 1, and words with falling pattern 1 remain unchanged. Suffixes without a circumflex simply add unstressed vowels to the end of the word, changing rising or falling pattern 1 to falling pattern 2, falling pattern 2 to falling pattern 3, and falling pattern 3 to no pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Word Formation=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=The Verb=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to Proto-Western, or even Empotle7á, Melì has a very simple, mostly agglutinative verbal morphology. The only obligatory part of a grammatical verb other than the stem itself is a prefix that agrees with the gender of the absolutive argument. The structure of the Melì verb is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Agreement||(Tense)||Verb Stem||(Incorporated Stem)||(Evidentiality/Aspect)||(Antipassive)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Agreement==&lt;br /&gt;
Agreement prefixes agree with the absolutive argument of the verb, regardless of the number of arguments or the transitivity of the verb. They are identical to noun classifiers and have the same meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes male humans and large or impressive animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;- denotes female humans and small or domesticated animals&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;- (&#039;&#039;&#039;ka&#039;&#039;&#039;- before the future tense marker or a root starting with o) denotes everything else.&lt;br /&gt;
For some animals, like horses, the prefix matches the sex of the animal, as it would for humans. When it comes to supernatural referents, agreement is a mix of logical and lexical. The prefix used for animal spirits and clan totems may match the sex of the animal, or default to &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Most deities are of Lukpanic origin, and use &#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039;- except for a small number of masculine deities which confusingly use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Ideas and other nonphysical things generally use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but a closed class of nouns, mostly having to do with traditionally feminine work, use &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The names of people almost always match the sex of the person, not the etymological root, but there are exceptions among mythical figures and heroes. Places that do not have a lexically transparent origin use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-; place names that do have an obvious meaning will usually use &#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039;-, but in some cases will use the marker appropriate to the etymological root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotaè&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-make-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is done. (literally &amp;quot;It is made&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obosisì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-ask-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They (said they) asked him/her. (absolutive could be a man, or possibly certain goddesses)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koní&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-reach&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have arrived. (literally &amp;quot;I have reached it&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tense==&lt;br /&gt;
The only tense marker is the optional future tense, marked with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;-. The non-future is unmarked, but the absence of a tense marker does not rule out the possibility of a future interpretation. Generally marked future tense indicates uncertainty or intention, not definite facts about the future, though ironically it is often used with the evidential suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039; to emphasize things that will surely come to pass. It is also used in interrogative sentences for polite requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will (obviously) succeed. (casual certainty about an accepted fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will probably succeed. (intention or prediction of future facts)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taodeodàu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-succeed-EVID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
She will definitely succeed. (emphatic assertion of fact)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incorporation==&lt;br /&gt;
Nouns and verbs can be incorporated into a matrix verb, but this process is not productive, and some combinations are not predictable. Some patterns of incorporation could be classed more as a form of derivation than syntax. For these reasons, incorporations are dealt with primarily in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Evidentiality/Aspect==&lt;br /&gt;
Evidential suffixes are not mandatory for all finite verbs, but most main verbs will have one in a typical discourse. Some of the suffixes also carry aspectual information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-ê||direct experience, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-mbel||direct experience, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-sî||indirect knowledge, perfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-on||indirect knowledge, imperfective&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-u||gnomic&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct experience suffixes mark direct sensory input, usually sight or sound. This implies that the speaker was present when the event occurred. They are almost never used in combination with -&#039;&#039;&#039;ode&#039;&#039;&#039;. Indirect knowledge suffixes mark reported speech or hearsay, whether dubious or certain. The gnomic suffix marks inferred or obvious information, and is often used for emphasis or to indicate a conclusion. By extension, it is also used to indicate controversial or surprising information, or sarcastically to indicate something highly dubious. Perfective suffixes mark events that have a clear ending, while imperfective suffixes mark events that are inherently atelic, or ongoing. The null suffix is also very common. It is used when the speaker does not consider any of the above information important, or when the same information would be repeated many times. The null suffix is also the most commonly used when the speaker is a participant in the event they are describing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;obué laná&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[I saw that] he cooked eggs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàbuon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[They say that] she cooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodesàmau&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will obviously end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antipassive==&lt;br /&gt;
The antipassive causes the agent of a normal transitive verb to become the subject of an intransitive verb, marked in the absolutive as usual. More information about transitivity and omitted arguments appears in the Arguments section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozòu uzí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID fish-ABS cat-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cats eat fish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaozouná uzí taé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat-EVID-ANTIP fish-ABS also&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fish also eat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Arguments=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Melì uses an absolutive-ergative system. The subject of intransitive verbs and the patient of transitive verbs (with some exceptions below) take the unmarked absolutive case, while the agent of transitive verbs takes the ergative suffix -&#039;&#039;&#039;î&#039;&#039;&#039; (or -&#039;&#039;&#039;bî&#039;&#039;&#039; after nasals). The vowel in the ergative suffix lowers to -&#039;&#039;&#039;ê&#039;&#039;&#039; when the previous syllable has a low vowel. The absolutive is also used for genitives and objects of adpositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;koìbida nèma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-float ship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boat floats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó Alsenaé ùsae&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat Alsèna-ERG fig-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena ate a fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozó ùsae Keda&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat FIG-ABS Keda-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He ate Keda&#039;s fig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olabè Alsenaé eòna najolá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-steal-EVD Alsèna-ERG chest-ABS POS-brother-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alsena stole my brother&#039;s chest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Intransitive verbs can take absolutive arguments, or no arguments, but never ergative ones. The absolutive argument, or subject, can have a variety of roles depending on the verb, but usually functions as an experiencer. Transitive verbs can take absolutive and ergative arguments, or none. If a transitive verb has an ergative argument, then it must also have an absolutive argument, but the absolutive argument may appear alone. In this case the verb has a passive or intransitive meaning. If the speaker wishes to supply the agent but not the patient of a transitive verb, the antipassive -&#039;&#039;&#039;nâ&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. Any omitted argument usually implies that the information is unimportant, unknown, or previously established and not worthy of repetition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosàu Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[He] saw Suma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;olaosauná Suma&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-see-EVID-ANTIP Suma-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suma saw [it].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last lexical class is split verbs, which are transitive and take arguments that use the same markings as transitive verbs, but with opposite meanings: the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; is actually an agent and the &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; is actually a patient. As with any other verb, the argument marked &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; can appear alone (in which case the verb has a stated agent and an implied patient), but the &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; cannot. These verbs are indicated in the lexicon, but the terms &amp;quot;ergative&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;absolutive&amp;quot; will be used throughout this grammar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;taòdeda ne kimé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-kill me-ERG shark-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I killed a shark. (normal transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na kimeì&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS shark-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought a shark. (split transitive)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tàsay na&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-fight me-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canonical word order is VOS or VSO. Absolutive arguments have a tendency to appear before ergative arguments, and new or emphasized information has a tendency to appear later among the arguments. Adverbs and adverbial phrases or clauses follow a free word order, but rarely appear between the subject and object of the clause in which they appear, and never split up other phrases. Arguments can be emphasized and moved in front of the verb with no morphological change. Nouns that are not subject or object may also appear before the verb to establish new topics, but in this case the noun phrase usually takes the orientative affix -&#039;&#039;&#039;â&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ta kadagomé&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANAP-ABS AGR-important&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what&#039;s important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adverbs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adverbs are any words that modify verbs, but not as subjects or objects. The semantic line between adverbs and nouns is thin (and a small set of roots can be both without derivation or changes in syntax, such as tso and soda), which is why they are both listed under “arguments.” Adverbs primarily provide information about time or manner. They generally appear immediately after the main verb or at the beginning or end of the clause, though they can appear almost anywhere that does not split a phrase. Nouns accompanied by an adposition can act like adverbial phrases. Entire clauses can also fill this role. Some common adverbs and a few examples of other adverbial constructions are given below. Note that some adverbs listed here function also as a type of conjunction linking clauses together. In these cases normal syntax applies; the adverb does not need to appear exactly between two clauses, since they are not true conjunctions (formally there are no clause conjunctions in Melì that cannot be explained as adverbs or particles, so they are not mentioned anywhere in this grammar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Adverbs&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ja||although even though&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tso||yesterday&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||soda||tomorrow&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||always&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||saezae||sometimes, rarely&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||etỳ||irrealis (marks hypotheticals and conditions)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mède||yet, still&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||màlta||already, anymore&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||also&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sin||and then&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sàmosan (sàmo+san)||to completion&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tolaosá||looking forward, planning for the future&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ne aozàon luigàe sàmosan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
always AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID meat-ABS completely&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He always eats up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;aozàon sàmosan ne luigàe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-eat(transitive)-EVID completely always meat-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone keeps eating up all the meat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adpositions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adpositions have split into two groups. The first have remained as separate words and appear before the head noun, becoming prepositions (listed as “free” in the chart below). The second have stayed at the end of the noun phrase, but suffixed to the previous word, becoming clitics (listed as “affixed” in the chart below). The first class is larger and perhaps not entirely closed, while the second class is very small and closed. The suffix kê can change the stress pattern of the word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Affixed&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-san||locative, used spatially, temporally, or metaphorically&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||-â||orientative&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Free&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||amà||with (for people)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kambé||towards, until, facing, before&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||kotsó||after, behind, from (for space or time)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||mèlan||along (an edge), during&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||tay||on, at, in (used mainly for places and containers)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||naokè||(rising) up to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||taza||similar to&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||sekè||down to, as far as (for distance)&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èel||in order to, following&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
||èdo||resulting in&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;sekè une làugo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as_far_as island near-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...as far as the nearest island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;une laugoá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
island near-AGR-ORI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...by navigating around the near island&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kotsó kumo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...from the magistrate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;saisan&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
god-in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...officially, by civic authority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Modifiers=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section generally deals with words, phrases, and clauses that modify, or in some cases replace, nouns and noun phrases. Many of these words require agreement suffixes. These are the same as the agreement prefixes of verbs: -&#039;&#039;&#039;ô&#039;&#039;&#039;, -&#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;, and -&#039;&#039;&#039;go&#039;&#039;&#039; (-&#039;&#039;&#039;ko&#039;&#039;&#039; after a grave mark). The same ambiguity exists as among agreement prefixes. The suffix for male humans may also be used for female goddesses and some animals, while the female suffix can be used for a wide variety of humans, animals, and in some limited cases other things. Whenever a noun&#039;s agreement is not obvious, it is specified in the lexicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adjectives==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjectives are their own part of speech, separate from nouns and verbs, although semantically there are stative intransitive verbs that function like predicate adjectives. The syntax of adjectives and quantifiers is identical, so they are treated together. Both types of modifier follow the head noun, and take an agreement suffix. The only real distinction between them is that quantifiers are mutually exclusive with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Partitive constructions like “a few of the ten people” use a longer construction with the anaphoric pronoun, which takes an otherwise defunct partitive prefix &#039;&#039;&#039;la&#039;&#039;&#039;-. Numbers are treated in more detail later in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kòtagon kená tongo kòbogyn&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-important horn-ABS long-AGR cow-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cow&#039;s long horn is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ko la oneó lanaò&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
man-ABS big-AGR many-AGR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many big men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pronouns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are six pronouns in Melì: the anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns, two indefinite pronouns, and two personal pronouns. All of them can take the place of nouns or, in their attributive form, modify nouns. The anaphoric and cataphoric pronouns are the main demonstratives in the language. They are especially important in copular and relative clauses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Anaphora!!Cataphora&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||ta||ko&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||taé||koí&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||eò/età/èko||koó/kodá/kogo&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indefinite demonstratives come in two forms, &#039;&#039;&#039;pa&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tada&#039;&#039;&#039;. The former is used for specific things unknown to the listener or hypothetical things, while the latter is used for comparisons or to indicate free choice. Both can be used in questions or conditional clauses using the irrealis &#039;&#039;&#039;etỳ&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!Indefinite 1!!Indefinite 2&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||pa||tada&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||paé||tadaé&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Attributive&lt;br /&gt;
||paó/padá/pago||tadaó/tadadá/tàdago&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The personal pronouns do not have attributive forms. For alienably possessed nouns, personal pronouns follow the modified noun in the absolutive to show possession, like a genitive noun. Inalienably possessed nouns take obligatory possessive prefixes &#039;&#039;&#039;na&#039;&#039;&#039;- and &#039;&#039;&#039;ta&#039;&#039;&#039;-.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! !!1st Person!!2nd or 3rd person&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Absolutive&lt;br /&gt;
||na||ta&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Ergative&lt;br /&gt;
||ne||te&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relative Clauses==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Relative clauses follow the noun they modify, but need not immediately follow it if another core argument is found in the matrix clause. The verb in a relative clause has no special marking, but the argument within the relative clause that matches the modified noun in the matrix clause will always be the anaphoric demonstrative. The cataphoric demonstrative may also stand in for the modified noun, creating a substantive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;le kaozú soban taí&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
snake-ABS AGR-eat mouse-ABS ANAP-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The snake that ate the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;soban kaozú leì ta&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mouse-ABS AGR-eat snake-ERG ANAP-ABS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mouse that the snake ate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kaodeozó ne ko kabu ta te&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-FUT-cook me-ERG CATP-ABS AGR-cook ANAP-ABS you-ERG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will eat what you cook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numbers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Melì number system is a hybrid of native Western and adopted Lukpanic numbers. Cardinal numbers up to eight precede the head noun, while cardinal numbers above eight and all ordinal numbers follow the head noun. All numbers up to eight use native roots, while numbers above eight use Lukpanic roots. There are two exceptions to this rule: the native word &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; (sixty four), used only as a cardinal number, and the Lukpanic word &#039;&#039;&#039;niun&#039;&#039;&#039; (five), used as a cardinal or isolated number only for non-human referents. Very often &#039;&#039;&#039;jalesé&#039;&#039;&#039; is used metaphorically to mean “a large number.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number system hides a great deal of synchrotism and compromise. The suffixing attributives of Lukpanic languages are unknown in Valley languages, and the Lukpanic suffixes attach to agentives &#039;&#039;&#039;sab&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039;. The latter is also used optionally for native ordinal numbers when used in isolation. The use of &#039;&#039;&#039;tab&#039;&#039;&#039; allows the complete absence of Lukpanic &#039;&#039;&#039;u&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;nu&#039;&#039;&#039; has also disappeared in recent times. The description given here is the most common system used in &#039;&#039;&#039;Asodeá&#039;&#039;&#039;, but many competing standards exist up and down the coast. Some Valley speakers use native or Lukpanic numbers exclusively. Others use only native numbers for people and only Lukpanic numbers for everything else. Some have a hybrid system similar to Melì, but with one or more terms reanalyzed (one common strategy is to use &#039;&#039;&#039;senal&#039;&#039;&#039; to mean ten when counting people, replacing it with Lukpanic terms for non-humans). Phonologically, the numbers are subject to numerous irregular sound changes, specifically vowels and tones changing to match those of an immediately adjacent number. The word &#039;&#039;&#039;eḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; should by &#039;&#039;&#039;oḍá&#039;&#039;&#039; according to regular sound changes, but is presumably influenced by nearby &#039;&#039;&#039;mená&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| {{greentable|lightgreenbg}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! !! Cardinal !! Isolated !! Ordinal&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
| tau - || tabó / tausí / tàugo || (ta) taù&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
| si - || siò / sisì / sìgo || (ta) sio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
| nasó - || nasoò / nasosì / nasògo || (ta) naso&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
| mená - || menaò / menasì / menàgo || (ta) mènao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
| (edá) - niun || edaó / edasí / èdago / niun || (ta) èdao&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
| minì - || miniò / minisì / minìgo || (ta) mìnio&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
| jasé - || jaseò / jasesì / jasègo || (ta) jàseo&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 8&lt;br /&gt;
| senal - || senaló / senasí / sènaso || (ta) jào&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 9&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu niun || sàdu niun || tàdu niun&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 10&lt;br /&gt;
| - mìbai || mìbai || ta mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 11&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàsu mìbai || sàsu mìbai || tàsu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 12&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàmi mìbai || sàmi mìbai || tàmi mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 13&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàbul mìbai || sàbul mìbai || tàbul mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 14&lt;br /&gt;
| - sàdu mìbai || sàdu mìbai || tàdu mìbai&lt;br /&gt;
|- align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! 15&lt;br /&gt;
| - ùlai || ùlai || tabùlai&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;mená kesá&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
four stones&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;kesá mènao&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the fourth stone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;tazeè menàgo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I want four.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;oadalu na tau poalé nasó lada&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AGR-accuse-EVID me-ABS one people-ERG three PART-ANAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the three made accusations against me.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mouse-tache</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>